studio4 leed v4 green associate 101 questions & 101 answers first edition.pdf

214

Click here to load reader

Upload: mohammad-j-haddad

Post on 16-Jan-2016

278 views

Category:

Documents


40 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

Green Building Education Services, LLC 5607 Glenridge Drive Suite 250 Atlanta, GA 30342 888.414.9998

www.gbes.com

The information provided in this manual is provided as-is and is subject to change without notice. All content in this manual are believed to be accurate but are presented without warranty of any kind, express or implied. LICENSE PLEASE READ THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS MANUAL (“MATERIALS”). BY USING THE MATERIALS YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE. NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED OR TRANSMITTED IN ANY FORM OR BY ANY MEANS, ELECTRONIC OR MECHANICAL, FOR ANY PURPOSE, WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN PERMISSION OF GREEN BUILDING EDUCATION SERVICES. THE MATERIALS THEREIN ARE PROVIDED "AS IS". GREEN BUILDING EDUCATION SERVICES (GBES) MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF ANY KIND WITH RESPECT TO THE MATERIALS, THEIR CONTENTS, OR INFORMATION. GBES EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF ANY KIND WITH RESPECT TO THE MATERIALS OR THEIR USE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. YOU AGREE THAT GBES, ITS DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR OTHER REPRESENTATIVES SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE CONTENT OR USE OF THE MATERIALS. YOU AGREE THAT THIS LIMITATION OF LIABILITY IS COMPREHENSIVE AND APPLIES TO ALL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION DIRECT, INDIRECT, COMPENSATORY, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE,AND CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. COPYRIGHT NOTICE The content of this document is the copyrighted property of Green Building Education Services, LLC. All other trademarks and graphics referenced in this document are the property of their respective owners. The U.S. Green Building Council (USGBC) did not participate in the development and/or publication of this book. The USGBC is not affiliated with Green Building Education Services, LLC. LEED and USGBC are registered trademarks of the U.S. Green Building Council. LEED Principles and LEED Green Associate Study Guide, Third Edition Copyright © Green Building Education Services, LLC All rights reserved.

Page 2: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

Contents Chapter 1 – Guiding Principles ........................................................................................................................ 4 Minimum Program Requirements (MPR) ........................................................................................................ 4 Chapter 2 – Integrative Process ...................................................................................................................... 7 Guiding Documents: OPR & BOD ................................................................................................................. 10 Healthcare Prerequisite | Integrative Project Planning and Design .......................................................... 14 Chapter 3 – Location and Transportation ..................................................................................................... 18 LT Credit 1 | LEED for Neighborhood Development Location ................................................................... 19 LT Credit 2 | Sensitive Land Protection ........................................................................................................ 20 LT Credit 3 | High Priority Site ....................................................................................................................... 24 LT Credit 4 | Surrounding Density and Diverse Uses ................................................................................. 26 LT Credit 5 | Access to Quality Transit ......................................................................................................... 30 LT Credit 6 | Bicycle Facilities ....................................................................................................................... 32 LT Credit 7 | Reduced Parking Footprint ...................................................................................................... 35 Transportation Demand Management .......................................................................................................... 36 LT Credit 8 | Green vehicles ........................................................................................................................... 37 Chapter 4 – Site Selection .............................................................................................................................. 41 SS Prerequisite 1 | Construction Activity Pollution Prevention ................................................................. 42 SS Prerequisite 2 | Environmental Site Assessment .................................................................................. 44 SS Credit 1 | Site Assessment ....................................................................................................................... 46 SS Credit 2 | Site Development – Protect or Restore Habitat ..................................................................... 47 SS Credit 3 | Open Space ............................................................................................................................... 50 SS Credit 4 | Rainwater Management ............................................................................................................ 53 SS Credit 5 | Heat Island Reduction .............................................................................................................. 57 SS Credit 6 | Light Pollution Reduction ........................................................................................................ 60 SS School Credit | Site Master Plan .............................................................................................................. 62 SS School Credit | Joint Use of Facilities ..................................................................................................... 63 SS Core and Shell Credit | Tenant Design and Construction Guidelines ................................................. 65 SS Healthcare Credit | Places of Respite ...................................................................................................... 66 SS Healthcare Credit | Direct Exterior Access ............................................................................................. 68 Chapter 5 – Water Efficiency.......................................................................................................................... 72 WE Prerequisite 1 | Outdoor Water Use Reduction 30% ............................................................................. 72 WE Credit 1 | Outdoor Water Use Reduction ............................................................................................... 74 WE Prerequisite 2 | Indoor Water Use Reduction 20% ................................................................................ 77 WE Credit 2 | Indoor Water Use Reduction .................................................................................................. 81 WE Prerequisite 3 | Building-level Water Metering ...................................................................................... 82 WE Credit 4 | Water Metering ......................................................................................................................... 84 WE Credit 3 | Cooling Tower Water Use ....................................................................................................... 86 Chapter 6 – Energy and Atmosphere ............................................................................................................ 93 EA Prerequisite 1 | Fundamental Commissioning and Verification .......................................................... 94 EA Credit 1 | Enhanced Commissioning .................................................................................................... 100 EA Prerequisite 2 | Minimum Energy Performance ................................................................................... 105 EA Credit 2 | Optimize Energy Performance .............................................................................................. 110 EA Prerequisite 3 | Building-level Energy Metering .................................................................................. 113 

Page 3: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

EA Credit 3 | Advanced Energy Metering ................................................................................................... 114 EA Prerequisite 4 | Fundamental Refrigerant Management ..................................................................... 117 EA Credit 6 | Enhanced Refrigerant Management ..................................................................................... 117 EA Credit 4 | Demand Response ................................................................................................................. 120 EA Credit 5 | Renewable Energy Production .............................................................................................. 123 EA Credit 7 | Green Power and Carbon Offsets ......................................................................................... 126 Chapter 7 – Materials and Resources ......................................................................................................... 134 MR Prerequisite 1 | Storage and Collection of Recyclables ..................................................................... 135 MR Prerequisite 2 | Construction and Demolition – Waste Management Planning ............................... 137 MR Credit 5 | Construction and Demolition Waste Management ............................................................. 138 MR Credit 1 | Building Life Cycle Impact Reduction ................................................................................. 142 Building Product Disclosure and Optimization Credit Suite .................................................................... 152 MR Credit 2 | BPDO - Environmental Product Declarations ..................................................................... 154 MR Credits 3 | BPDO - Sourcing of Raw Materials .................................................................................... 159 MR Credit 4 | BPDO - Material Ingredients ................................................................................................. 164 MR Healthcare Prerequisite | PBT Source Reduction - Mercury .............................................................. 167 MR Healthcare Credit | PBT Source Reduction – Mercury ....................................................................... 168 MR Healthcare Credit | PBT Source Reduction – Lead, Cadmium, and Copper .................................... 168 MR Healthcare Credit | Furniture and Medical Furnishings ..................................................................... 168 MR Healthcare Credit | Design for Flexibility ............................................................................................. 169 Chapter 8 – Indoor Environmental Quality ................................................................................................. 172 IEQ Prerequisite 1 | Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance................................................................ 172 IEQ Credit 1 | Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies ............................................................................. 176 IEQ Prerequisite 2| Environmental Tobacco Smoke Control ................................................................... 182 IEQ Credit 2 | Low Emitting Materials ......................................................................................................... 183 IEQ Credit 3 | Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan ........................................................... 186 IEQ Credit 4 | Indoor Air Quality Assessment ............................................................................................ 188 IEQ Credit 5 | Thermal Comfort ................................................................................................................... 191 IEQ Credit 6 | Interior Lighting ..................................................................................................................... 192 IEQ Credit 7 | Daylight .................................................................................................................................. 196 IEQ Credit 8 | Quality Views ......................................................................................................................... 202 IEQ Prerequisite Schools | Minimum Acoustic Performance ................................................................... 203 IEQ Credit 9 | Acoustic Performance .......................................................................................................... 205 Key Terms ...................................................................................................................................................... 207 Chapter 9 - Innovation .................................................................................................................................. 209 Chapter 10 – Regional Priority ..................................................................................................................... 214 

Page 4: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

4

Chapter 1 – Guiding Principles

LEED’s Goals

The best place to start is to understand ‘Why’ undertake the effort to achieve LEED certification. The USGBC publishes the following seven goals in the preface of every reference guide. They are the drivers for the intent and requirements of all prerequisites and credits. In addition, these goals inform the weighting of points. If you have ever wondered why one strategy is worth five points, but another only one, it is directly related to these goals. Credits that offer the greatest benefit towards the most important goals also offer the most amount of points. The goals are: To reverse contribution to global climate change To enhance individual human health and well-being To protect and restore water resources To protect, enhance, and restore biodiversity and ecosystem services To promote sustainable and regenerative material resources cycles To build a greener economy To enhance social equity, environmental justice, community health, and quality

of life

Minimum Program Requirements (MPR)

Building upon the goals, the second set of guiding principles are Minimum Program Requirements (MPRs). These three requirements are the mandatory conditions that make a project eligible to pursue LEED certification. The MPRs are not part of the rating system, and project teams do not have to document them. Acknowledgment that your project meets the MPRs is taken during the registration process.

MPR 1 | Permanent Location on Existing Land

The first MPR is the project must be in a permanent location on existing land. The idea is, if you are going to measure the building energy and water use, it must be from a consistent location to trend patterns over time. Therefore, boats and mobile homes are excluded from LEED certification. Prefabricated structures are acceptable as long as they are not broken down or moved after initial occupancy.

Page 5: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

5

In addition, a project may not construct new piers, jetties, infill, or other manufactured structures over water exclusively for the LEED project. Your project may be located on such structures only if they are previously developed.

MPR 2 | Reasonable Site Boundary

The second MPR is a project must use a reasonable site boundary. This makes sure the building and features primarily used by it’s occupants are accurately evaluated. The site includes hardscapes, parking, stormwater treatment and landscaping. The boundary should be contiguous land delineated by ownership, management, or lease. Gross floor area of the project building should be no less than 2% of the gross land area within the boundary.

MPR 3 | Project Size Requirements

The third MPR is a project must comply with the project size requirements. The size requirements are all different based on the type of rating system. Make sure you check the rating system or reference guide to make sure you know what the minimums are for your project type. As an example a BD+C project must include a minimum of 1,000 square feet (93 square meters) of gross floor area. An ID+C project must include a minimum of 250 square feet (22 square meters) of gross floor area.

Selecting a Rating System

Project teams are empowered to select the rating system and adaptation that best fits their project building’s program. There are lot of online resources to help you make the best-fit selection, including this fun, interactive graphic (http://www.usgbc.org/discoverleed/). The rating system adaptations covered in this study guide are as follows: LEED BD+C: New Construction and Major Renovation. New construction or

major renovation of buildings that do not primarily serve K-12 educational, retail, data centers, warehouses and distribution centers, hospitality, or healthcare uses. New construction also includes high-rise residential buildings 9 stories or more.

LEED BD+C: Core and Shell Development. Buildings that are new construction or major renovation for the exterior shell and core mechanical, electrical, and plumbing units, but not a complete interior fit-out.

LEED BD+C: Core and Shell is the appropriate rating system to use if more than 40% of the gross floor area is incomplete at the time of certification.

LEED BD+C: Schools. Buildings made up of core and ancillary learning spaces on K-12 school grounds.

LEEDBD+C: Schools may optionally be used for higher education and non-

Page 6: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

6

academic buildings on school campuses. LEED BD+C: Retail. Buildings used to conduct the retail sale of consumer

product goods. Includes both direct customer service areas (showroom) and preparation or storage areas that support customer service.

LEED BD+C: Data Centers. Buildings specifically designed and equipped to meet the needs of high density computing equipment such as server racks, used for data storage and processing.

LEED BD+C: Data Centers only addresses whole building data centers (greater than 60%).

LEED BD+C: Warehouses and Distribution Centers. Buildings used to store goods, manufactured products, merchandise, raw materials, or personal belongings, such as self-storage.

LEED BD+C: Hospitality. Buildings dedicated to hotels, motels, inns, or other businesses within the service industry that provide transitional or short-term lodging with or without food.

LEED BD+C: Healthcare. Hospitals that operate twenty-four hours a day, seven days a week and provide inpatient medical treatment, including acute and long-term care.

LEED BD+C: Homes and Multifamily Lowrise. Single-family homes and multi-family residential buildings of 1 to 3 stories. Projects 3 to 5 stories may choose the Homes rating system that corresponds to the ENERGY STAR program in which they are participating.

LEED BD+C: Multifamily Midrise. Multi-family residential buildings of 4 to 8 occupiable stories above grade. The building must have 50% or more residential space. Buildings near 8 stories can inquire with USGBC about using Midrise or New Construction, if appropriate.

Key Terms | Guiding Principles

MPR Previously Developed Hardscape Site Boundary Rating System

Page 7: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

7

Chapter 2 – Integrative Process

Integrative Process

The integrative process is a foundation in LEED v4, and uses the knowledge of team members to find the best solutions for a project. LEED has encouraged for many years integrated project teams, but now in LEED v4 it is actually rewarding projects for documenting the process. The first thing you will notice is this credit is not part of any category. It isn’t found under Sustainable Sites, Innovation in Design, or any other category. The credit stands alone. There is also a pre-requisite for Integrative Project Planning and Design, exclusively for the Healthcare rating system. Because the idea behind this credit impacts every LEED credit, it was not put in a category by itself, nor was it added to an existing credit. The Integrative Design credit is optional for all rating system except LEED for Healthcare. But smart teams will follow the guidance and easily earn the point with straightforward documentation of the teamwork that adds value to their project. The goal is to uncover opportunities that might be missed in a more traditional process. The Integrative Process credit in LEED v4 asks design teams to explore energy- and water- related improvements early in design. Moreover, it asks teams to use energy modeling to explore synergies and cost impacts across interrelated systems — to perform holistic investigations rather than the targeted, credit-specific calculations.

IP vs. IPD

Integrated/Integrative what’s in a name? The terms “integrated” and “integrative” are often used interchangeably. Originally the term integrated was used to describe this collaborative design process, but Bill Reed, president of the Integrative Design Collaborative and a principal of Regenesis Development, has championed the use of the term integrative because it is a verb in present tense and the work of this iterative, ongoing process is never done. Appreciating this distinction, many organizations in the sustainability movement have adopted the term integrative, although both terms are still in use. Another point of confusion is the overlap with the AIA’s Integrated Project Delivery (IPD) Guide. AIA’s IPD is a contractual agreement with the Owner, designer and contractor where all these parties share the benefits and risks of a development project.

Page 8: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

8

Using the Integrative Process (IP) to steer Integrated Project Delivery is a natural fit. Just remember IP is the process and IPD is the contract. The USGBC official definition of the integrative process is ‘an iterative, collaborative approach that involves a project’s stakeholders in the process from visioning through completion of construction and throughout building operation.’ It has to be collaborative; having a dialog between participants. The challenge is working under a project budget and schedule. The timeline includes everything from the initial visioning charrette through building operations. Building professionals need to look at a project through different lenses-not just design or construction. To fully understand what impact the building operations will have, teams must consider how the design process affects both the construction and the operations together. It’s great if a LEED project has a very lofty goal for energy performance, but if the facility managers can’t operate the building when it’s done, it doesn’t matter how good the design was.

What is the building’s purpose?

Essentially the integrative process needs to first and foremost understand the purpose of the project. Who it is serving, and what is the mission. Engage everyone to understand what their needs are, what their wants are, and what their expectations are for the building’s performance. You have to establish what the drivers are for the project, to set the rules for the project that will not be broken. Why are you building this building? If you understand the purpose, the mission, and the drivers, you can create the elements that are important to the stakeholders by measuring the value-that is what integrative design is all about.

Integrative Project Team

Who is in the integrative project team? You are inviting everyone with particular areas of expertise. There are a lot of team members with varying responsibilities. Owner’s capital budget manager

Architect or building designer

Mechanical engineer

Structural engineer

Energy modeler

Equipment planner

Acoustical consultant

Telecommunications designer

Controls designer

Food Service Consultant

Page 9: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

9

Infection Control Staff

Building science or performance testing agents

Green building or sustainable design consultant

Facility green teams

Physician and nursing teams

Facility managers

Environmental services staff

Functional and space programmers

Commissioning agent

Community representatives

Civil engineer

Landscape architect

Ecologist

Land planner

Construction manager or general contractor

Life cycle cost analyst; construction cost estimator

Lighting Designer

Other disciplines appropriate to the specific project type

By getting feedback from everyone early on and having the stakeholders interact together, all phases of the project benefit. Resources get used more efficiently, costs are reduced, change orders are reduced, and a higher value building is achieved.

Discovery and Implementation

With this new credit, LEED rewards projects for using an integrative process. The credit focusses on the discovery portion of the integrative process – preparation, evaluation, and conceptual design. This is the very earliest part where project team members are getting an understanding of the unique needs and challenges of their projects, an understanding of the project goals, what the owner ultimately wants, and what their priorities are. The idea is you are at least looking at water and energy analysis during two early phases. The discovery phase is commonly referred to as schematic design, pre-design, or analysis of rough for. The implementation phase is the actual design, once you get into the construction details, and eventual construction. The discovery process is very important because the performance analysis is going to tell you exactly how the building should perform. It’s going to give you great insight into not only how the building performs (outputs) but what the drivers are (inputs) to make it

Page 10: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

10

perform in a certain way and to be able to manage that building. The building’s outputs, ie. energy use, water use, et cetera are going to define the environmental footprint of that building. It’s really important to be able to understand what the systems, or drivers, are and their sensitivities so the whole team can optimize the inputs. The purpose here is to really take all of that information, put it together and make early design decisions that help the project in its execution and in its operation. Ideally projects will lessen the number of decisions that are changed as the project team goes through construction, or at least lessen the number of challenges faced along the way because the right things were considered upfront, including budget and schedule. To make this credit more attainable to project teams the focus was placed on ways to get the project team to develop valuable documentation that would help with building performance rather than submitting meeting notes and project goals. The credit includes worksheets that walk the project team through the iterative analysis associated with their energy and water related systems. Documentation is done by completing a worksheet and providing a simple box energy model result. The big issue with the integrative process is getting the owner to understand that it’s going to take some time and require everyone to get involved, and meet for a day. Everyone agrees on the priorities, and then everyone continually checks in to ensure that the goals and priorities stay in focus as the project moves along.

Guiding Documents: OPR & BOD

Every LEED project is supposed to be guided by two documents, the Owner’s Project Requirements (OPR) and Basis of Design (BOD), which define the project goals and strategies for meeting them. The basis of design is the information necessary to accomplish the owner's project requirements, including system descriptions, indoor environmental quality criteria, design assumptions, and references to applicable codes, standards, regulations, and guidelines. These documents are required as part of the basic commissioning process, which has long been mandatory in LEED. Basic commissioning doesn’t begin until the design documents are 50 percent completed, however—and project teams, being deadline driven, all too often fail to produce the OPR and BOD until that time. The integrative process credit defines steps that must happen before design gets underway to inform the content of those documents. You have to address positions early in the process. You can’t decide at 50 percent construction that you’re going to collect all your rainwater in your building. You cannot decide at 50 percent construction that you are going to change the systems in your building. You have to do it much earlier in the process.

Page 11: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

11

Beginning in discovery and continuing throughout the design phases, identify and use opportunities to achieve synergies across disciplines and the building’s energy and water related systems. Use the analyses to inform the OPR, BOD, design documents, and construction documents.

Energy Modeling Analysis

What would you want to do for energy in the discovery phase? Collect information in order to establish a baseline. Every decision made going forward will be compared to the baseline. You can’t establish your baseline half way through the construction. By then you have designed your building and there is no opportunity to make changes in the design. Perform a preliminary “simple box” energy modeling analysis before the completion of schematic design that explores how to reduce energy loads in the building and accomplish related sustainability goals by questioning default assumptions. Assess at least two potential strategies associated with each of the following: Site conditions, such as assessing shading from surrounding buildings

Massing and orientation, and their impacts on HVAC loads, energy use, and renewable energy

Envelope attributes, such as insulation levels, glazing ratios, and shading

Lighting levels, in occupied spaces and interior surface reflectance

Thermal comfort ranges, including expanding the comfort zone

Plug and process load reductions

Programmatic and operational settings, such as schedules, occupancy, and required square footage

Some software packages allow you to do a very quick model on the schematic design and frankly those interactions are really critical. Often by the time the full energy model is done it’s too late to make significant changes. The decisions need to be made early before anything moves forward, especially trying to balance the relationships among systems. A lot of new buildings are still including a lot of glass curtain walls and you start to wonder whether it is possible to optimize the energy efficiency of the design with that kind of form.

Page 12: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

12

Energy Documentation

For credit documentation, demonstrate how the analysis informed design and decisions in the project’s OPR including the following, as applicable: Building and site program;

Building form and geometry;

Building envelope and façade treatments on different orientations;

Elimination and/or significant downsizing of building systems (e.g., HVAC, lighting, controls, Exterior materials, interior finishes, and functional program elements); and

Other systems.

Water Budget Analysis

Water improvement is the next part of the integrative process. Can you get a non-potable sources for sewage conveyance? Will waterless urinals be acceptable for the occupants? If it’s a hotel project, what is the lowest shower flow rate the owner will allow? For water related systems, perform a preliminary water budget analysis before the completion of schematic design that explores how to reduce potable water loads in the building and accomplish related sustainability goals. By just documenting what project teams are planning, projects can earn this credit and have big water savings. A water budget is a project-specific method of calculating the amount of water required by the building and associated grounds. The budget takes into account indoor, outdoor, process, and makeup water demands, including any on site supply like rain or greywater. Water budgets are associated with a specified amount of time, such as a week, month, or year and a quantity of water. It’s like your personal budget at home. Take into account your water related income, from supply sources such as rainwater and graywater, and compare it to the water expenditures – toilets, irrigation, and cooling towers. Assess and estimate the project’s potential nonpotable water supply sources and water demand volumes, including the following: Indoor water demand. Assess flow and flush fixture design case demand

volumes, calculated in accordance with WE Prerequisite Indoor Water-Use Reduction.

Outdoor water demand. Assess landscape irrigation design case demand volume calculated in accordance with WE Credit Outdoor Water-Use Reduction.

Page 13: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

13

Process water demand. Assess kitchen, laundry, cooling tower, and other equipment demand volumes, as applicable.

Supply sources. Assess all potential nonpotable water supply source volumes, such as on-site rainwater and graywater, municipally supplied nonpotable water, and HVAC equipment condensate.

Water Documentation

And again you need to document how the analysis informed design and equipment selection decisions in the project’s OPR and BOD and the eventual design of the project, including the following, as applicable: plumbing systems;

sewage conveyance and/or on-site treatment systems;

rainwater quantity and quality management systems;

landscaping, irrigation, and site elements;

roofing systems and/or building form and geometry; and other systems.

Using the USGBC Worksheet

The Integrative Process worksheet supplied by USGBC can help project teams organize the information required for credit documentation. Looking at the form, the steps are to: Describe the baseline assumptions for each component

Describe at least two potential load reduction strategies that were assessed for each aspect through the simple box energy modeling before the completion of schematic design

Describe how research and analysis uncovered through the discovery influenced the project building program, form, geometry, and/or configuration

Provide a brief explanation of how the research and analysis uncovered through discovery influenced the project design and/or resulted in system downsizing. If applicable, give reasons for not addressing topics.

Describe how this process informed changes made to the OPR and BOD.

You don’t have to use the worksheet, but it’s helpful if you don’t want to create your own system.

Timeline

When are you going to work on this credit? The requirements make it pretty clear - before the completion of schematic design your energy and water analysis budgets need

Page 14: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

14

to be completed. The owner and most of your lead designers are going to be involved in providing input into these two primary building systems – water and energy.

Healthcare Prerequisite | Integrative Project Planning and Design

The healthcare adaptation has an Integrative Project Planning and Design prerequisite. It is the only rating system adaptation that has this prerequisite. The intent is to maximize opportunities for integrated, cost-effective adoption of green design and construction strategies, emphasizing human health as a fundamental evaluative criterion for building design, construction and operational strategies. We’ll review the prerequisite requirements because the process for the prerequisite reinforces the same process we just discussed to have a successful integrative design.

Health Mission Statement

Prepare an Owner’s Project Requirements (OPR) document. Develop a health mission statement and incorporate it in the OPR. The health mission statement must address "triple bottom line" values—economic, environmental and social. Include goals and strategies to safeguard the health of building occupants, the local community and the global environment, while creating a high-performance healing environment for the building’s patients, caregivers and staff. If you work on a non-healthcare project the OPR should have a mission statement that would be related to the project type or goals. In the case of a healthcare project, this OPR will of course be specific to the hospital’s mission.

Preliminary Rating Goals

As early as practical and preferably before schematic design, conduct a preliminary LEED meeting with a minimum of four key project team members and the owner or owner’s representative. As part of the meeting, create a LEED action plan that, at a minimum: Determines the LEED certification level to pursue (Certified, Silver, Gold, or

Platinum);

Selects the LEED credits to meet the targeted certification level; and

Identifies the responsible parties to ensure the LEED requirements for each prerequisite and selected credit are met.

Again, this is something project teams need to do anyway for a LEED project. You’re going to sit down with the project team and discuss what credits we can achieve, what

Page 15: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

15

our target certification level is, and who is going to be responsible for those credits we work towards.

Design Charrette

As early as practical and preferably before schematic design, conduct a minimum four-hour, integrated design charrette with the project team as defined above. The goal is to optimize the integration of green strategies across all aspects of building design, construction and operations, drawing on the expertise of all participants. This should be starting to sound familiar if you have worked on a LEED project or one with an integrative design. Write a mission statement, develop performance goals, vet materials, and identify desired occupant experiences.

Selecting a Team

A lot of big firms are doing this process already, but what if it’s new territory? Some owners may be used to hiring an architect and having the architect take care of everything else, like hiring the consulting engineers, and other team members. That might not work to get optimum results. What if the project team has one LEED v4 expert and that person finds a new job, and everyone else doesn’t have a clue what’s going on or why they are doing it. That’s a problem too. The lighting design is usually going to play a critical role in many areas of the project, so what happens if the lighting consultant or the lighting designer isn’t well versed in integrative design. Another problem. Picking the right team members is a critical decision. Do they have experience, do they buy into the process, do they understand the why and the how? You need to have buy-in from the team, and make sure there is more than one expert, or better still, junior staff who can shadow the expert and learn. If you’re project goal is a Gold or Platinum level certification, you’ll probably want a team that thinks outside the box as well, so they can come up with creative solutions to earn the maximum number of points available by having synergies between credits.

IP Case Study

Clearly the integrative process is a dynamic and creative venture for all involved. Just as it evolves individual projects from conventional practice to sustainable to regenerative, the integrative process itself will evolve to meet the ever-new and demanding

Page 16: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

16

opportunities in the design of our built environment. Only by learning and evolving with it will we be able to create the sustainable future we envision for our children. We’ll close this presentation with an example of what can be achieved through the integrative process. This is the Bullitt Center, a super-efficient office space at 1501 East Madison Street, designed to become the world’s largest functioning, commercial Living Building, using an estimated 83 percent less energy than a typical Seattle office building and achieving Net Zero Energy and Net Zero Water. The building reaches these goals through a variety of systems such as: A high performance building envelope.

A layout designed to optimize natural light, an estimated 82 percent of the Center’s spaces are lit by natural sunlight.

Careful coordination with tenants to reduce their “plug loads” by over 75 percent through the use of high-efficiency monitors, copiers, laptops, zero clients and cloud based servers.

26-bore, 400 foot-deep geo-exchange HVAC system that harvests energy from the earth to provide efficient heating and cooling.

Radiant floor system to efficiently heat and cool office spaces.

242 KW roof-top photovoltaic array to provide all the net energy needed for the building.

Rainwater and greywater reclamation systems including a 56,000-gallon cistern to capture rainwater and a constructed wetland to treat greywater.

Foam flush, composting toilets reduce toilet water consumption by 96 percent.

Each week there was a meeting with the architects, owner, and contractor, as well as sub-contractors as needed. Working closely with the engineers, every change the architects made had to move closer to the performance target. The engineers examined the performance impact of each design change to understand its impact on the building performance. It is a systems-based design approach, both organic and science-based. Margaret Sprug noted that this was more of an integrated process with the engineers than on any other Miller Hull project she had worked on in her office, and Brian Court commented that this project is the first purely performance-driven design for the firm. “The attention-getting elements of the Bullitt Center—100% onsite renewable energy, water and waste management, as well as a safe, naturally day-lit and ventilated work environment built to last 250 years—follow from an equally exciting integrated design process that enabled us to move beyond the traditionally linear design, engineering and

Page 17: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

17

construction process to orchestrate a diverse team targeting the seemingly impossible together, right from the start,” said Craig Curtis, design partner with The Miller Hull Partnership. “In considering first and foremost how to design a building with essentially no environmental footprint, it was energizing to identify imaginative and elegant ways to beautifully express the building’s core performance functions through design strategies using a mix of existing and new technologies, systems, and materials. While in one sense we had to do more with less, we happily found that designing to high-performance targets actually opened up numerous formal design opportunities.”

Key Terms | Integrative Process

Integrative Holistic IPD Iterative OPR BOD Simple box energy model Envelope Water budget Health Mission Statement Charrette Regenerative

Page 18: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

18

Chapter 3 – Location and Transportation

New Category

Let’s get started with the Location & Transportation credit category. This is a new credit category for LEED. While it is a new credit category, most of the credits were extracted out of the sustainable sites category from the prior version of LEED. If you worked on a LEED for New Construction project under LEED 2009, these credits should look familiar to you.

Community Relationships

Why the division? The credit categories were divided to separate a building’s relationship to its community versus its relationship to its site and the site ecosystem. To be successful with the credits in the location and transportation category, a project team is going to need to be familiar with the surrounding areas of the site and the public transportation that is available.

Synergy with Neighborhood Development Projects

The Location and Transportation credit category has 8 credits, and no prerequisites. LT Credit 1: LEED for Neighborhood Development Location

Can earn up to 16 points. That is a huge number of points and emphasizes how LEED is trying to push sustainable neighborhoods and the alignment between the other rating systems and the LEED ND rating system, so they all become a more cohesive family of rating systems.

LT Credit 2: Sensitive Land Protection; can earn one point

LT Credit 3: High Priority Site; can earn 2 points

LT Credit 4: Surrounding Density and Diverse Areas; can earn up to 5 points

LT Credit 5: Access to Quality Transit; can earn up to 5 points

LT Credit 6: Bicycle Facilities; can earn up to 1 point

LT Credit 7: Reduced Parking Footprint; can earn 1 point

LT Credit 8: Green Vehicles; can earn 1 point

What is interesting to note here is if you add up the points from credits 2 through credits 7, they come out to a total possible of 16 points. That is the same as the maximum for the

Page 19: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

19

LEED for Neighborhood Development location credit. What’s happening here is if you locate a project in a LEED ND development, your paperwork gets streamlined and just went down significantly. This was one of the goals for LEED version 4. By tying the rating systems closer together the paperwork gets reduced. Project teams may only submit either credit one solely, or any combination of credits 2-7 to achieve the maximum of 16 points. Of course if locating your project in a LEED ND location isn’t possible, you still have the option of earning up to 16 points by attempting the other credits in this category. It will just take more documentation to do so.

LT Credit 1 | LEED for Neighborhood Development Location

Let’s start with the credit for LEED for Neighborhood Development Location. The intent of this credit is to avoid development on inappropriate sites, to reduce vehicles miles or kilometers traveled, and to enhance livability and improve human health by encouraging daily physical activity. This is a new credit and encourages selection of a LEED ND certified site. This credit is designed to give project teams a streamlined path to earn points.

Must be a LEED ND certified project

The requirements are to locate the project within the boundary of a development certified under LEED for Neighborhood Development (Stage 2 or Stage 3 under the Pilot or 2009 rating systems, Certified Plan or Certified Project under the LEED v4 rating system). Your project team needs to find a LEED ND project to site the building in. As we mentioned in the introduction, if a project attempts this credit then the project is not eligible to earn any of the other location and transportation credits.

Point Distribution

The number of points a project can earn varies based on the project type, and the certification level of the LEED ND project. The possible point totals are listed in this table.

Certification Level 

Points NC Points Core and Shell 

Points School Points 

Healthcare 

Certified  8  8  8  5 

Silver  10  12  10  6 

Gold  12  16  12  7 

Platinum  16  20  15  9 

Page 20: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

20

This table is going to be handy during your pre-planning. Don’t just assume that putting your project in a LEED ND location is going to earn you the most points in this category. It’s possible that by achieving credits 2 through 7 individually or in some combination that your project could earn more points than attempting the LEED ND location credit.

Review Question

True or False: Project teams that attempt LT Credit LEED for Neighborhood Development Location can also attempt other credits in the LT category. Answer is: False. Your project can either attempt this credit, or attempt one or more of the other credits were going to be discussing next. If you pursue this credit, your documentation is easier.

LT Credit 2 | Sensitive Land Protection

The intent is to avoid the development of environmentally sensitive lands and reduce the environmental impact from the location of a building on a site. This credit is the evolution of the Sustainable Sites credit Site Selection in LEED 2009. This credit addresses wetlands, waterbodies, floodplains, and prime farmland.

2 Options

There are 2 options for this credit. The first option is to develop on previously developed land. The second option is to develop on previously developed land or land that does not meet the criteria for sensitive land. Each option can earn one point, and you pick one option or the other.

Option 1: Previously Developed Land

Option 1 requires locating the development footprint on land that has been previously developed. There are some key terms here that are important for this requirement. The development footprint is the total land area of a project site covered by buildings, streets, parking areas, sidewalks, and other typically impermeable surfaces constructed as part of the project. It’s not just the building itself, but the entire sum of all physical development. It’s not enough to put the building on a previously developed area and put the parking lot next door in a greenfield. And what does previously developed mean? It is land that has been altered by humans, such as paving, construction, and/or land use that would typically have required regulatory permitting to have been initiated (alterations may exist now or in the past). If 100% of the land within your LEED boundary is previously developed, you may build

Page 21: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

21

anywhere. If 40% of the area within the LEED project boundary is previously developed, your project team has to prioritize that 40% of the site for new development. The date of previous development permit issuance constitutes the date of previous development, but permit issuance in itself does not constitute previous development. So it’s a bit of a technical definition to determine if your site is previously developed, rather than just looking at an empty paved parking lot and saying ‘ok, this is a previously developed site.’ In prior LEED versions there would be projects on huge greenfields and a tiny portion of the land was developed, and the project team would say ‘oh, previously developed’. That is not the case anymore. Land that is not previously developed and landscapes altered by current or historical clearing or filling, agricultural or forestry use, or preserved natural area use are considered undeveloped land. By developing on previously developed land, we can conserve and preserve undeveloped land, which promotes natural habitats for species diversity and stormwater infiltration.

Option 2: Avoid Land meeting Sensitive Criteria

Option 2 applies to undeveloped land, or greenfield conditions. The intent is avoiding building on land that meets one of the sensitivity criteria. Do not develop on portions of sites that meet any of these criteria. When it says, “Do not develop,” think carefully about what development means. Development means not just the building. It’s also hardscapes, roadways, and sidewalks, which are all parts of the building project. When it says don't develop, the requirements mean all of those.

Prime Farmland

Do not develop on prime farmland. The U.S. Code of Federal Regulations defines prime farmland. In addition, the Natural Resources Conservation Service (NRCS) maintains detailed maps with soil data identifying soil as prime, unique, or of state significance.

Floodplains

Do not develop on undeveloped floodplains. What if there was somewhere in New Orleans that falls into a flood plain, but it previously had a building on it? If I develop there, am I still eligible to receive this credit? And the answer is yes. It’s only new developments or previously undeveloped areas that aren’t allowed within this limit. However, developed areas are ok. Flood hazard maps must delineate areas with a 1% or greater chance of flooding in any given year. FEMA is the referenced standard used to determine floodplains.

Page 22: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

22

Habitat

Protect habitats for endangered species. Remember there are both endangered plant and animal species. There are several standards used for identifying endangered species. The U.S. Fish and Wildlife service sponsors both the U.S. Endangered Species Act and the NatureServe Heritage Program. The act lists threatened and endangered animals. NatureServe classifies habitats that are home to species identified as GH (possibly extinct), G1 (critically imperiled) or G2 (imperiled).

Water Bodies

Do not develop land within 100 feet (30 meters) of a water body such as a stream (including intermittent streams), arroyo, river, canal, lake, estuary, bay, or ocean. It does not include irrigation ditches. This buffer is generous because if human impacts affect the water body, from stormwater runoff, it will quickly end up in the ocean or our drinking water supply.

Wetlands

Do not develop land within 50 feet (15 meters) of any wetlands. Wetlands are areas

inundated or saturated by surface or ground water at a frequency and duration sufficient

to support a prevalence of vegetation typically adapted for life in saturated soil conditions. This buffer is smaller than water bodies because the primary purpose of a wetland is to filter water of contaminants! That doesn’t mean you can pollute at will, but if you need a metaphor, wetlands are nature’s water filter.

International Projects

For international project teams, you may need to identify local equivalencies from many reference standards. Working with a qualified biologist or ecologist may be necessary to identify those local equivalencies. Organizations likely to have qualified members include the Chartered Institution of Water and Environmental Management, the Institute of Ecology and Environmental Management, and the Institute of Environmental Management and Assessment.

Implementation

The credit does allow for making minor improvement within the wetland and water body buffers, if these improvements are for the betterment of the site. Improvements include: Bicycle and pedestrian pathways no more than 12 feet wide (3.5 meters), of

which no more than 8 feet (2.5 meters) may be impervious;

Activities to maintain or restore native natural communities and/or natural hydrology;

Page 23: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

23

One single-story structure per 300 linear feet (90 linear meters) on average, not exceeding 500 square feet (45 square meters);

Grade changes necessary to ensure public access;

Clearings, limited to one per 300 linear feet (90 linear meters) on average, not exceeding 500 square feet (45 square meters) each;

Removal of the following tree types:

Hazardous trees, up to 75% of dead trees

Trees less than 6 inches (150 millimeters) diameter at breast height

Up to 20% of trees more than 6 inches (150 millimeters) diameter at breast height with a condition rating of 40% or higher.

Trees under 40% condition rating

The condition rating must be based on an assessment by an arborist certified by the International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) using ISA standard measures, or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.

Brownfield remediation activities.

As you consider that list you can visualize how each of those improvements does indeed add to the user experience of the site. Allowing your project occupants to visually connect with natural habits can increase their awareness of how special these ecosystems are to the broader community.. Minor improvements align with the triple bottom line that respects people and the planet as equally valuable to your building’s profit.

Sample Question

A technology firm is deciding on a location to build a new data center. Which of the following sites would be most appropriate? A. Developed site 30 feet (9 meters) from a fishing stream B. Land with a species classified as possibly extinct by NatureServe C. Undeveloped land in a flood plain as defined by FEMA D. Undeveloped land that is 40 feet (12 meters) from a stream E. Brownfield that is 80 feet (24 meters) from a wetland F. Organic tree nursery defined as prime farmland

E is the correct answer. Focus on the word ‘most.’ First prioritize conservation of greenfields; B, C, and D are off limits. Now there are three choice remaining, all previously developed sites: A, E, and F. A is too close to the stream, development should be at least 100 feet from a body of water. F is classified as prime farmland, which meets the definition of sensitive site and will not earn the credit. E is highly desirable for a LEED project. It is a brownfield so it is previously developed, and it is more than 50 feet from the wetland.

Page 24: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

24

LT Credit 3 | High Priority Site

The next LT Credit is High Priority Site. The intent is to encourage project location in areas with development constraints and promote the health of the surrounding area. This credit merges the Brownfield Redevelopment credit from LEED 2009 along with a credit that is in the LEED ND rating system into this new credit for LEED v4. The credit encourages project teams to select sites with difficult development constraints.

Three Options

Option1 is to locate the project on an infill site in a historic district. 1 point for BD&C, 2 points for CS.

Option 2 is to locate the project in an area with a priority redevelopment designation. 1 point for BD&C, 2 points for CS

Option 3 is brownfield remediation. 2 points for BD&C, 3 points for CS

Historic Districts

A historic district is a group of buildings, structures, objects, and sites that have been designated or determined to be eligible as historically, culturally or architecturally significant, and categorized as either contributing or noncontributing to the historic nature of the district. These districts are usually designated by a local or national group or agency. A 100 year old neighborhood doesn’t automatically qualify as historic just because its old - it has to be designated as such. In the United States we have the National Register of Historic Places that has the official list of the Nation's historic places worthy of preservation. An infill site is a site where at least 75% of the land area, exclusive of rights-of-way, within ½ mile (800 meters) of the project boundary is previously developed. A street or other right-of-way does not constitute previously developed land; it is the status of property that matters. Developing on an infill site contributes to the overall health and livelihood of a neighborhood by reducing vacant space for crime and blight. Layering this benefit over a historic district ensures the longevity of the social character and regional vernacular. These can be very desirable places to live or work.

Priority Designation

This option is where you find the rating system working on the economic and social nature of the LEED rating systems. They are trying to get projects to move into underserved neighborhoods and areas to promote growth.

Page 25: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

25

Locate the project on one of the following: a site listed by the EPA National Priorities List;

a Federal Empowerment Zone site;

a Federal Enterprise Community site;

a Federal Renewal Community site;

a Department of the Treasury Community Development Financial Institutions Fund Qualified Low-Income Community

a site in a U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development’s Qualified Census Tract (QCT) or Difficult Development Area (DDA)

Note that the project will qualify as a priority designation if only part of the site is located within one of the priority designations. In the LEED documentation the project team will need to include a site map that indicates the portion of the site in the priority area. Projects outside the U.S. can use a local equivalent program administered at the national level.

Brownfield Remediation

The definition of brownfield is property reuse which may be complicated by the presence, or potential presence, of a hazardous substance, pollutant or contaminant. For this option projects locate the building on a brownfield where soil or groundwater contamination has been identified, and where the local, state, or national authority (whichever has jurisdiction) confirms its remediation. Your team is either going to remediate the site, or you can locate on a site that has already been remediated and designated as a brownfield. Contaminated sites can be identified by two different processes. The owner may perform a phase two environmental site assessment to demonstrate that contamination is present. Sometimes, a site is designated as a Brownfield by local, state or federal government agencies. Either one of these counts as a brownfield redevelopment. Remediation is the process of cleaning up a contaminated site by physical, chemical, or biological means. Remediation processes are typically applied to contaminated soil and groundwater. Project teams have to perform remediation to the satisfaction of the identified authority.

Environmental Site Assessment

A phase two environmental assessment tells you what the problems are and perhaps suggests what remediation is needed. Then the remediation experts would come in to help you identify what needs to be done. The scope of work varies based on type and

Page 26: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

26

magnitude of contamination. It could be safely demolishing existing structures, or treating soil and groundwater. New technologies can minimize site disruption, treat contamination, and monitor the site factors like air and water to ensure contaminants do not return.

Case Study: Tassafaronga

Tassafaronga in Oakland California earned LEED for Homes Platinum Certification and LEED ND Plan Gold. The project is an apartment building with supportive housing units, medical facility, and townhouses. The project size is 7.5 acres with a budget of $58

million.

Tassafaronga was originally founded in 1945 by the U.S government as temporary housing for wartime workers in Oakland’s shipyards. In 1964, the Oakland Housing Authority (OHA) acquired the property and replaced the original structures with 87 concrete low-rise public housing units. Tassafaronga Village, as the project was quaintly and optimistically christened, devolved into a breeding ground for drug and gang crime. Deep fissures in the concrete and seismic issues added to the deteriorating scenario. For decades, Tassafaronga, in Oakland, California, sat in a blighted condition, continually declining, and the home of crime and drug lords. It was a dangerous brownfield, tainted

with asbestos, lead, and toxic insecticides.

Creative financing and environmentally enlightened development strategies brought about transformation. In 2007, OHA secured permission to demolish the project, officially deemed “severely distressed.” Tassafaronga Village was ultimately dismantled and rebuilt with 97 percent of its waste materials recycled, many reused on site, including

existing concrete foundations ground up for the project's new road base.

LT Credit 4 | Surrounding Density and Diverse Uses

The intent of this credit is to conserve land and protect farmland and wildlife habitat by encouraging development in areas with existing infrastructure and social benefits. Density promotes walkability, transportation efficiency, reduces vehicle distance traveled, and improves public health by encouraging daily physical activity.

Two Options

While this is really one credit, it offers two distinct and different options for point achievement. The first option is surrounding density which can earn 2 to 3 points. The second option is diverse uses, which can earn 1 to 2 points. Projects may pursue both options.

Page 27: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

27

Surrounding Density

The goal is to locate the project on a site whose surrounding density within ¼ mile (400 meter) meets the following thresholds for either combined, or separate residential and nonresidential densities.

Combined Density

Separate Residential and Nonresidential Densities

Points BD+C (except CS)

Points Core and Shell

SF/acre DU/acre FAR

22,000 7 0.5 2 2

35,000 12 0.8 3 4

Residential density is measured by dwelling units per acre or hectare. Nonresidential density is measured by floor area ratio. If the number of dwelling units cannot be determined, combined density calculations are the best path. For mixed-use building, apply a weighted average.

Density Calculations

For documentation you’ll need a map of your project site with a ¼ mile or 400 meter radius drawn around the project site. If a building falls halfway within the radius, it is still counted in the calculations. You count the entire building, not just the percentage that falls within the radius. You can find out the size of the buildings from the local tax assessor’s office. Start with what you think are the most dense buildings first. If the dense buildings are enough to meet the credit requirements, then you can stop calculating the rest of the buildings because you’ve met the requirements at that point. Include all properties in the density calculations except for undeveloped public areas such as parks and water bodies. Also, do not include public roads and right-of-way areas. You do have to include any unused, buildable land within the radius. Do not include the project building, or non-habitable space, such as parking garages.

Diverse Uses

The goal is to locate the project within a ½ mile (800-meters) walking distance of diverse uses. The key here is walking distance, not a fixed radius. Meaning it can’t be on the other side of the freeway which is within ½ mile ‘as the crow flies’, but is inaccessible without walking more than ½ mile. Proximity to four to seven uses earn a project one point, or 2 points for eight or more.

Page 28: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

28

Use Types and Categories

A use type is something the public would use, like a library or a bank. That’s key, it has to be a publicly available use, not a private club. It also has to exist at the time of submitting the LEED certification documents. Uses that are planned but not completed don’t count. LEED defines the following use categories: Food retail include supermarkets and other food stores with produce sections

Community serving retail, which include

Convenience store

Farmers market

Hardware store

Pharmacy

Other retail

Services, which include

Bank

Family entertainment venue such as a theatre or sport place

Gym, health club, exercise studio

Hair care

Laundry, dry cleaner

Restaurant, café, diner (excluding those with only drive-thru service)

Civic and community facilities, which include

Government office that serves public on-site

Medical clinic or office that treats patients

Place of worship

Police or fire station

Post office

Public library

Public park

Social services center

Community anchors uses, like a commercial office, or housing

There are some restrictions on counting the uses: A use counts as only one type (e.g., a retail store may be counted only once even

if it sells products in several categories).

Page 29: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

29

No more than two uses in each use type may be counted (e.g. if five restaurants are within walking distance, only two may be counted).

The counted uses must represent at least three of the five categories, exclusive of the building’s primary use.

Diverse Use Calculations

On a map, draw a half mile walking distance from the building’s main entrance. Mark all the uses. You can do this with Google maps or a similar mapping program. Show that the uses are easily walk accessible. If there were any obvious obstacles, like rivers or freeways, it would show how those would be crossed. The review staff are quite particular in the documentation as to if there is a safe pedestrian path, or sidewalk that lets people access the services safely.

Rating System Adaptation

For healthcare projects either option may earn just one point for achieving the lowest density thresholds (22,000 SF/AC, 7 DU/AC, 0.5 FAR) or seven uses. A warehouse, as you might expect, isn’t likely to be located near diverse uses or in dense areas, so the options are completely different. Warehouse Option 1 is renamed, Development and Adjacency, which can earn 2 to 3 points. Construct or renovate the project on a previously developed site that was used for industrial or commercial purposes. (2 points). Or project teams can construct or renovate the project on a site that is both a previously developed and an adjacent site. The adjacent sites must be currently used for industrial or commercial purposes (3 points). Warehouse Option 2 is renamed, Transportation Resources, which can earn 1 to 2 points. For this option, construct or renovate the project on a site that has two or three (1 point) or four (2 points) of the following transportation resources: The site is within a 10-mile (16 kilometer) driving distance of a main logistics

hub, defined as an airport, seaport, intermodal facility, or freight village with intermodal transportation.

The site is within a 1-mile (1600-meter) driving distance of an on-off ramp to a highway.

The site is within a 1-mile (1600-meter) driving distance of an access point to an active freight rail line.

The site is served by an active freight rail spur.

In all cases, a planned transportation resource must be sited, funded, and under construction by the date of the certificate of occupancy and complete within 24 months of that date.

Page 30: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

30

LT Credit 5 | Access to Quality Transit

The intent of this credit is to encourage development in locations shown to have multimodal transportation choices or otherwise reduced motor vehicle use, thereby reducing greenhouse gas emissions, air pollution, and other environmental and public health harms associated with motor vehicle use.

Stops and Service

This credit has two requirements. First, locate any functional entry of the project within a ¼-mile (400-meter) walking distance of existing or planned bus, streetcar, or rideshare stops, or within a ½-mile (800-meter) walking distance of existing or planned bus rapid transit stops, light or heavy rail stations, commuter rail stations or ferry terminals. This is the establishment portion of the credit. Planned stops and stations may count if they are sited, funded, and under construction by the date of the certificate of occupancy and are complete within 24 months of that date. In addition to proximity, the transit services need to meet trip minimums. This is the performance portion of this credit. Each transit routes must have service in opposite directions, however, only trips in one direction are counted towards the threshold. Transit must meet the minimums for both weekend and weekday to count. The next page displays a table identifying the multiple thresholds to reward increased frequency of service. Minimum Daily Service for Multiple Transit Types (bus, streetcar, light rail, ferry)

Weekday Trips Weekend TripsPoints BD+C (except CS)

Points Core and Shell

72 40 1 1

144 108 3 3

360 216 5 6

Minimum Daily Service for Commuter Rail or Ferry Service Only (long distance)

Weekday Trips Weekend Trips Points all projects

24 6 1

40 8 2

60 12 3

Projects served by two or more routes where neither route provide greater than 60% of daily rides may earn an additional point for diversity of service.

Page 31: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

31

Temporary Detours

If existing transit service is temporarily rerouted outside the required distances for less than two years, the project may meet the requirements, provided the local transit agency has committed to restoring the routes with service at or above the prior level. This can be an issue with construction projects where traffic is detoured while the construction is going on.

Documentation

Similar to the Density and Diverse Uses credit, compliance is verified by locating your project building on a map that identifies all transit stops and pedestrian walking distance from building entries. In addition, teams must count aggregate trips available at all qualifying transit stops. Compliance can be demonstrated by any combination of bus, rail, etc. to meet the minimum daily stops. Timetables or service-level documentation must be provided to verify available trips.

Example Transit Service Summary

Weekday Weekend

Day A Weekend

Day B Weekend Average

Bus #1 100 75 25 50

Bus #2 80 60 30 45

Light Rail 25 18 10 14

Total 205 109

Point Threshold

3 3

Example Route Diversity Summary

Weekday Weekend Average

Total

Bus 80 60 137 (80%)

Light Rail 25 10 32 (20%)

Total Service 105 67 172

This example does not meet 60% for extra point.

Rating System Adaptations

The school adaptation has two options. Option 1 is Transit-Served location. It’s similar to what we just discussed except there are no weekend trip requirements, just weekday only. The walking distance and minimum trip numbers are all the same from the base credit. The point totals for mixed transit types are 1, 2, or 4.

Page 32: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

32

Option 2 is Pedestrian Access. Show that the project has an attendance boundary such that the specified percentages of students live within no more than a ¾ mile (1200-meter) walking distance (for grades 8 and below, or ages 14 and below), and 1 1/2-mile (2400-meter) walking distance (for grades 9 and above or ages 15 and above) of a functional entry of a school building. If 50% of students are within walking distance, the project earns 1 point. 2 points for 60%, and 3 points for 70% or more. To document pedestrian access, use mapping software to create a walkshed boundary based on appropriate radius. The walkshed conveys a representation of walkability that is customized to the school address. Overlay the walkshed boundary with an attendance boundary map and estimate what percentage of students are within the walkshed boundary. The Healthcare rating system also has an adaptation that requires weekend trips but offer limited points, only 1 or 2 based on the first tow thresholds of daily rides.

Exemplary Performance

Double the highest transit service point threshold for an additional point in the Innovation category (except Schools option 2).

LT Credit 6 | Bicycle Facilities

The intent of this credit is to promote bicycling and transportation efficiency and reduce vehicle distance traveled, and to improve public health by encouraging utilitarian and recreational physical activity. New to LEED v4 is the addition of a bicycle network requirement. In the past, projects just had to install bicycle storage and shower rooms. It was considered an easy point to get, but the intent to promote health and reduce vehicle miles was missed. By requiring the project to be located near a bicycle network, LEED is trying to get more people to actually ride their bikes to work by having part of the requirements be proximity to a safe and reliable bike lane or path.

Bicycle Network

First we’ll look at the bicycle network requirements-if you don’t have this, you can’t earn the credit. A bicycle network is a continuous network consisting of any combination of the following: physically designated on-street bicycle lanes at least 5 feet (1.5 meters) wide;

Page 33: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

33

off-street bicycle paths or trails at least 8 feet wide for a two-way path and at least 5 feet (1.5 meters) wide for a one-way path

streets designed for a target speed of 25 mph (40 kmh)

The bicycle network must connect one of the following: ten diverse uses, access to quality transit, or a school or employment center (if 50% or more residential). All destinations must be within three miles of the project. Planned lanes or trails may be counted if fully funded by date of occupancy and scheduled for completion within one year.

Bike Storage and Showers

The requirements vary by building type, but they all require both long and short term bicycle storage, minimum four each (eight total), and at least one shower with changing facility. Case 1 is for commercial or institutional projects Provide short-term bicycle storage for at least 2.5% of all peak visitors, but no fewer than four storage spaces per building. Provide long-term bicycle storage for at least 5% of all regular building occupants, but no fewer than four storage spaces per building in addition to the short-term bicycle storage spaces. Provide at least one on-site shower with changing facility for the first 100 regular building occupants and one additional shower for every 150 regular building occupants thereafter. Visitors not included in this calculation because they are assumed to stay for only short visits. Case 2 is for residential projects Provide short-term bicycle storage for at least 2.5% of all peak visitors but no fewer than four storage spaces per building. Provide long-term bicycle storage for at least 30% of all regular building occupants, but no less than one storage space per residential unit in addition to the short-term bicycle storage spaces. Case 3 is for mixed-use projects Meet the Case 1 and Case 2 storage requirements for the nonresidential and residential portions of the project, respectively.

Page 34: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

34

Storage Accessibility

For all projects, short-term bicycle storage must be within 100 feet (30 meters) walking distance of any main entrance. This could be near the main lobby where a visitor or guest is going to arrive and conveniently park their bike for quick entry, like a courier delivering a package. Long-term bicycle storage must be within 100 feet (30 meters) walking distance of any functional entry. Note the slight difference there. Short term storage must be near a main entrance, long term storage may be near any functional entry. Long term storage could be in a covered parking deck or at the back of the building near secure entry reserved for employees only.

Sample Calculation

How many bike storage spaces and showers are required for an office building with: 100 occupants working 8 hours per day. 20 part time employees in the building working 4 hours per day. 50 daily average visitors, 30 peak time visitors.

1) Calculate the full time equivalents (FTE) to identify regular occupants for long term

storage. 100 full time + ((20 part time x 4 hours) / 8 hours per day) = 110 FTE or regular building occupants.

2) Select peak visitors to identify short term storage requirements. Note: ‘daily average’ refers to the number of visitors over a 24-hour period; ‘peak’ is the number of visitors measured at highest occupancy. We will use 30 visitors in this example.

3) Calculate storage required for regular occupants at 5% of total: 110 x 0.05 = 5.5, round up to 6, verify it meets minimum of 4-yes. Provide 6 long term bike storage spaces

4) Calculate storage required for visitors at 2.5% of total: 30 x 0.025 = 0.75, round up to 1, does not meet minimum of 4. Provide 4 short term bike storage spaces.

5) Calculate showers required with the following equation: If regular occupants > 100; 1 + ((regular building occupants – 100) / 150) = showers 1 + ((110-100)/150) = 1.067, round up to 2. Provide two showers.

Summary:

Provide 6 long term bike storage spaces for 110 regular occupants. Provide 4 short term bike storage spaces for visitors. Provide two showers to regular occupants.

Page 35: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

35

Advocacy

When the project team is considering site locations, don’t eliminate sites that don’t have access to a bicycle network without trying to work with the local government. They might be willing to work with by adding bike lines, lowering the street speed limit, or helping in other ways.

LT Credit 7 | Reduced Parking Footprint

The intent of this credit is to minimize the environmental harms associated with parking facilities, including automobile dependence, land consumption, and rainwater runoff. The implication is if there’s less parking, people are motivated to walk, get a bus, get a bike, or do something other than drive.

Requirements

The referenced standard used in this credit is the Institute of Transportation Engineers’ Transportation Planning Handbook, 3rd edition (ite.org). To earn the credit, project teams must not exceed local code, and provide parking capacity that is either 20% or 40% less than the baselines adapted from the ITE guidance. The LEED reference guide offers over 70 use types and associated parking ratios in units like space/SF, space/DU, or space/seat. In addition, projects must provide preferred parking for carpools for 5% of total parking spaces after the reduction.

Reduction based on LT Credit Synergy

If your project has not attempted any points under Surrounding Density and Diverse Uses credit or Access to Quality Transit credit, Case 1, projects must achieve a 20% reduction from the base ratios. If your project anticipates to earn one or more points under Surrounding Density and Diverse Uses or Access to Quality Transit, Case 2, projects must achieve a 40% reduction. This increased threshold encourages projects in dense neighborhoods to employ rigorous design strategies to support transit ridership and open space at ground level.

5% Preferred Parking

LEED defines preferred parking as the parking spaces closest to the main entrance of a building (exclusive of spaces designated for handicapped persons). For employee parking, it refers to the spaces that are closest to the entrance used by employees. Preferred parking is not required if no off-street parking is provided. Do not count spaces for fleet vehicles.

Page 36: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

36

Implementation

Projects with no off street parking automatically achieve credit compliance and do not require preferred parking spaces. To reduce parking below code minimums, work with local zoning officials and apply for a waiver if needed. Designers should also work with future occupants to estimate parking needs and select a site that balances transit infrastructure with parking reduction goals. Ensure that the design does not just displace parking; instead of actually reducing it. If everyone parks on the street instead of a private lot; it creates the same problems as having a big parking lot, potentially even more.

Transportation Demand Management

Especially in the United States, the concept of reducing parking lot size can be met with opposition and uncertainty. Creating a Transportation Demand Management Plan is a great strategy to overcome barriers to reducing parking, however, it is not required for credit achievement. Beyond locating near mass transit, building owner or managers can initiate programs to alleviate the need for parking. Physical programs could be sharing parking with neighboring buildings or providing shuttles between the project building and transit hubs. Social programs could be allowing telecommuting, compressed work weeks, or providing transit subsidies. Residential buildings can consider renting or selling parking sepratly from the dwelling unit.

Calculation Example

Let’s say your project is a major renovation of a 10,000 square foot health club in an existing property with 100 parking spaces. The project is also attempting LT Credit: Surrounding Density and Diverse Uses. How should they re-design their parking lot to achieve LT Credit: Reduced Parking Demand? 1) Calculate baseline parking capacity using the table in the reference guide. For health

clubs, the baseline is 7 parking space per 1,000 square feet. (10,000 / 1,000) x 7 = 70 parking space is the baseline for this project.

2) Calculate parking reduction based on LT credit synergies. Since the project is also attempting Surrounding Density and Diverse Uses, it must achieve a 40% parking reduction. 70 x 0.04 = 28 space reduction.

3) Arrive at target space count but subtracting the reduction from the baseline. 70-28 = 42 spaces in final design.

4) Designate 5% of total as preferred parking.

Page 37: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

37

42 x 0.05 = 2.1, round up to 3. Three spaces should be marked with signage near the main entry as reserved for carpools.

5) Create a plan to renovate existing parking lot. Since 100 spaces already exist on the site, but we can only have 42 to earn the credit, the project must demolish 58 spaces. Since the building already exists, we cannot design the footprint to go on top of these demolished spaces. Instead, the next best function of that area is a permeable, vegetated use to promote water infiltration and reduce the heat island effect-synergies with the Site Selection category. Since it is a health club, you may even consider a community vegetable garden.

Exemplary Performance

To achieve exemplary performance, triple or double the parking reduction from the baseline capacity. Case 1 must demonstrate a 60% reduction and Case 2 must demonstrate an 80% reduction.

LT Credit 8 | Green vehicles

The intent of this credit is to reduce pollution by promoting alternatives to conventionally fueled automobiles. This credit requires two components to promote green vehicle ownership: providing preferred parking and providing fueling stations. Parking spaces that include fueling stations must be provided separate from, and in addition to, preferred parking spaces for green vehicles. The first thing we need to know is what’s a green vehicle? LEED’s definition is vehicles achieving a minimum green score of 45 on the American Council for an Energy Efficient Economy (ACEEE) annual vehicle rating guide. International project teams must use a local equivalent that addresses fuel economy and vehicle emissions ratings, including particulate matter (PM), nitrogen oxides (NOx), hydrocarbons, and carbon monoxide (CO), and present a side-by-side comparison.

5% Preferred Parking

To incentivize building users to purchase and drive cars like a low-emission vehicle (LEV), designate 5% of all parking spaces as preferred parking for Green Vehicles. Distribute preferred parking spaces proportionally among various parking sections (e.g. between short-term and long-term spaces). A discounted parking rate of at least 20% for green vehicles is an acceptable substitute for preferred parking spaces. The discounted rate must be publicly posted at the entrance of the parking area and permanently available to every qualifying vehicle.

Page 38: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

38

2% Alternative-Fuel Fueling Stations

To encourage building users to invest in green vehicles like a hybrid or zero emission vehicle (ZEV), install alternative fuel stations. Consider the legal, technical, and safety issues when selecting the type of fuel to provide on-site, and choose one of the following two options. Option 1 is electric vehicle supply equipment (EVSE). Clearly identify and reserve these spaces for the sole use by plug-in electric vehicles. The EVSE must: Provide a Level 2 charging capacity (208 to 240 volts) or greater.

Comply with the relevant regional or local standard for electrical connectors

Be networked or internet addressable and be capable of participating in a demand-response program or time-of-use pricing to encourage off-peak charging.

That last requirement is key because it’s not something you would normally think of – the charger has to be connected to the Internet. You can do that via wi-fi, cellular, or a hard line to the project’s network. This requirement is a synergy with energy and atmosphere credit demand response. Option 2 is for liquid, gas, or battery facilities. Examples of low-polluting, nongasoline fuels include hydrogen, propane, compressed natural gas, liquid natural gas, and ethanol. Install liquid or gas alternative fuel fueling facilities or a battery switching station capable of refueling a number of vehicles per day equal to at least 2% of all parking spaces. When providing alternative fueling stations, poll future building occupants to see what fuel they need. Compare the environmental & economic costs and benefits of alternative fuels, and research local codes and standards for fueling stations in the area. Project teams also need to learn about the safety and maintenance issues associated with alternative fuels

Rating System Adaptations

Schools have an additional option to provide green buses and school-owned vehicles in lieu of preferred parking and fueling stations. 100% of school buses must meet emissions standards within seven years of the building’s certificate of occupancy. nitrogen oxide (NOx) emissions of 0.50 grams or less per brake horsepower-hour particulate matter emissions of 0.01 grams or less per brake horsepower-hour 100% of all other non-bus fleet vehicles must achieve a green score of 45 or

more.

Page 39: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

39

For Warehouse projects there are two different options. Option 1 is to purchase at least one yard tractor that is powered by electricity, propane, or natural gas, and a refueling station for the tractor. Yard tractors are trucks that move trailers around a warehouse yard. Think of it like one of those small vehicles that are used to push around big airplanes at the airport. The second option for warehouse projects is to reduce truck idling. Provide outlets for at least 50% of loading dock doors so drivers can operate in-cab features without leaving their truck engines idling at the dock. An example of this would be a refrigerated trailer containing perishable produce. The truck needs to stay running to keep the contents cool. Instead of leaving the truck idling while it’s waiting to be unloaded, the trailer could be hooked up to electricity from the loading dock so the truck engine can be turned off while the trailer contents are kept cold.

Location and Transportation Synergies

Schools have an additional option to provide green buses and school-owned vehicles in lieu of preferred parking and fueling stations.

Page 40: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

40

Key Terms | Location and Transportation

Wetlands Waterbodies Floodplains Flood hazard maps prime farmland Natural Resources Conservation Service (NRCS) endangered species NatureServe Heritage Program greenfield previously developed stormwater infiltration arborist International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) National Register of Historic Places infill site brownfield Remediation phase two environmental assessment density dwelling units per acre (DU/ac) floor area ratio (FAR) non-habitable space walking distance main logistics hub freight rail spur Transit-Served location walkshed boundary bicycle network peak visitors Institute of Transportation Engineers’ Transportation Planning Handbook preferred parking Transportation Demand Management Plan American Council for an Energy Efficient Economy (ACEEE) green score of 45 Green Vehicles ZEV electric vehicle supply equipment (EVSE)

Page 41: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

41

Chapter 4 – Site Selection

Overview

The Sustainable Sites credit category has 6 common credits between the BD+C Rating Systems. There are 5 other credits for different LEED adaptations. There is one common prerequisite, and one prerequisite specific to Schools and Healthcare. SS Prerequisite 1 | Construction Activity Pollution Prevention

SS School Prerequisite 2 | Environmental Site Assessment

Only required for School and Healthcare projects

SS Credit 1 | Site Assessment

can earn one point for all BD&C rating systems

SS Credit 2 | Site Development Protect or Restore Habitat

can earn 1 to 2 points for all BD&C rating systems, except for Healthcare which can earn one point

SS Credit 3 | Open Space

can earn one point for all BD&C rating systems

SS Credit 4 | Rainwater Management

can earn 1 to 3 points for all BD&C rating systems, except for Healthcare which can earn 1 to 2 points

SS Credit 5 | Heat Island Reduction

can earn 2 points for all BD&C rating systems, except for Healthcare which can earn 1 point

SS Credit 6 | Light Pollution Reduction

can earn 1 point for all BD&C rating systems

It’s worth remembering which credits have multiple points associated with them. The implication there is that they have a greater environmental benefit. The Architects of LEED v4 have weighted credits based on their contributions to the seven goals mentioned in chapter one of this study guide. We can see in this section that Rainwater Management is inherently more important than, Light Pollution Reduction. In addition, School and Healthcare projects have extra sensitivities, which require Environmental Site Assessments, whereas that approach is optional for other rating systems.

Page 42: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

42

These next credits are specific to certain rating systems. SS School Credit | Site Master Plan

can earn one point for Schools

SS School Credit | Joint Use of Facilities

can earn one point for Schools

SS Core & Shell Credit | Tenant Design and Construction Guidelines

can earn one point for Core & Shell

SS Healthcare Credit | Places of Respite

can earn one point for Healthcare

SS Healthcare Credit | Direct Exterior Access

can earn one point for Healthcare

Bear in mind that, in the end, all rating systems have a total of 110 points, but they distribute them based on what’s important. You’ll hear it over and over again – it’s important to start early with these credits as they affect the size and shape of the footprint of your building.

SS Prerequisite 1 | Construction Activity Pollution Prevention

This prerequisite applies to all of the BD&C rating systems. The intent is to reduce pollution from construction activities by controlling soil erosion, waterway sedimentation, and airborne dust. The thing you need to remember is that construction activity pollution refers to erosion and sedimentation. More explicitly, erosion of top soil harms ecosystem services, and sedimentation, or silt in stormwater runoff, impairs waterways. To avoid these negative impacts of construction, teams are required to produce and follow an erosion and sedimentation control plan (ESC). What is your project site receives little rainfall? If so, then it probably produces a lot of dust, so your pollution source is airborne and your pollution prevention plan must address dust rather than stormwater sedimentation.

Reference Standard

The ESC plan must comply with the 2012 EPA construction general permit or local standards and codes, whichever is more stringent. The EPA’s guidance is a really

Page 43: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

43

common approach in LEED because it’s a national system adopted by many municipalities. Of course, LEED says if the local codes or standards are more stringent, you have to follow those. If the local jurisdiction requires a construction general permit (CGP) based on National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES), then using the CGP is a streamlined path and no additional ESC plan is required. Let’s look at these standards more closely. Storm water discharges from construction activities (such as clearing, grading, excavating, and stockpiling) that disturb one or more acres, or smaller sites that are part of a larger common plan of development or sale, are regulated under the NPDES storm water program. Prior to discharging storm water, construction operators must obtain coverage under an NPDES permit, which is administered by either the state (if it has been authorized to operate the NPDES storm water program) or EPA, depending on where the construction site is located. Where EPA is the permitting authority, construction storm water discharges are almost all permitted under the CGP. The CGP requires compliance with effluent limits and other permit requirements, such as the development of a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP). If you have driven by a construction site before you may have seen a SWPPP permit posted on the perimeter right near the entrance to the project. The government takes these very seriously and if a project is found to be in violation of the plan the local agency may shut down construction until the issues are remedied. For international projects you’ll need to find a local equivalent code.

Prevention Activities

Three different categories of action identified within the CGP must be followed for every project: erosion and sedimentation control, stabilization, and pollution prevention. Erosion and sedimentation control Providing natural buffers

Installing perimeter controls

Minimizing sediment track-out

Controlling discharges from stockpiled sediment or soil

Minimizing dust

Minimizing the disturbance of steep slopes

Preserving topsoil

Minimizing soil compaction

Protecting storm drain inlets

Maintaining control measures

Page 44: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

44

Stabilization Deadlines for initiating and completing stabilization

Criteria for stabilization

Pollution Prevention Prohibited discharges

General maintenance requirements

Pollution prevention standards

Emergency spill notification

Fertilizer discharge restrictions

Project teams should start by evaluating the site specific needs. Pay attention to slope, rainwater management control (like existing storm sewers), weather conditions, and entrances to local roads. Every project will require different strategies to achieve the above stated actions. For example you could stabilize the soil through temporary seeding, permanent seeding, or mulching. Larger structural controls like an earth dike, terracing, riprap, and a silt fence are frequently used. You may have driven by a construction site and seen hay bales around sewer drains or next to sidewalks, this prevents sedimentation in runoff water. In addition, gravel at the construction entrance helps keep soils on the site and off the roads. Sometimes vehicles are even washed prior to entering the public right away from a muddy jobsite. These concepts are not just for LEED compliance. The property owner can be fined for overburdening the public infrastructure and impacting stable environmental conditions. Weekly inspections from the local municipality enforce the ESC plan. The ESC plan is created by a civil engineer and included in the drawing set used by contractor.

SS Prerequisite 2 | Environmental Site Assessment

This one is for schools and healthcare only, which are what you would call sensitive types of occupancy. The intent is to protect the health of vulnerable populations by ensuring that the site is assessed for environmental contamination and that any environmental contamination has been remediated. The assessment shall cover soil, groundwater, and surface water.

Process

The project team will start with a phase one environmental site assessment (ESA). This assessment is superficial and limited and identifies whether contamination is suspected. If the conclusion is, “there was a drycleaner here at some point,” that would mean one

Page 45: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

45

can suspect some contamination. The report may state no contamination if the prior use was a greenfield or daycare. If contamination is suspected, then a phase two environmental assessment is required, including specific and in-depth analysis of soil and water conditions. If contamination is found or perceived to be on the site, then you are mandated to remediate the site.

Referenced Standard

The Phase I ESA must comply with ASTM E1527-05 procedures. Typical actions include review of historical records, site visit, interviews, and a full report documenting findings. No collection of physical samples or chemical analysis is done. LEED considers a Phase I ESA valid for 180 days. If the assessment is between 180 days and one year old certain updates must be made to different sections of the assessment. An assessment older than one year must be redone. A Phase II ESA must comply with ASTM E1903-11 procedures. It is an investigation that collects original samples of soil, groundwater, or building materials to analyze in a laboratory for quantitative values of various contaminants. Typical findings include: petroleum hydrocarbons, heavy metals, pesticides, solvents, asbestos, and mold. Sites previously occupied for industrial or manufacturing use commonly have residual contamination.

Remediation

If a site is contaminated according to a Phase II ESA, then it must be remediated prior to re-use. Strategies vary depending on scope and type of contamination. Common remediation activities include: Pump and treat

Solar detoxification

Using bioreactors

Land farming

In-situ remediation

On-going monitoring

Page 46: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

46

SS Credit 1 | Site Assessment

This site assessment is about everything else besides contaminants. The intent is to observe site conditions before design, and evaluate sustainable options to inform major decision. You can think of it as the integrative process for the site design. Project teams will need to document a site survey or assessment of the site’s characteristics. Project teams need to ask – what is happening on the site in terms of soil, habitat, what are the options for space preservation, what are the human uses of the facility? This credit encourages project teams to maximize natural qualities of the site to take advantage of passive water and energy opportunities. Elements of a Site Assessment: Topography. Contour mapping, unique topographic features, slope stability risks.

Hydrology. Flood hazard areas, delineated wetlands, lakes, streams, shorelines, rainwater collection and reuse opportunities, TR-55 initial water storage capacity of the site (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.).

Climate. Solar exposure, heat island effect potential, seasonal sun angles, prevailing winds, monthly precipitation and temperature ranges.

Vegetation. Primary vegetation types, greenfield area, significant tree mapping, threatened or endangered species, unique habitat, invasive plant species.

Soils. Natural Resources Conservation Service soils delineation, U.S. Department of Agriculture prime farmland, healthy soils, previous development, disturbed soils (local equivalent standards may be used for projects outside the U.S.).

Human use. Views, adjacent transportation infrastructure, adjacent properties, construction materials with existing recycle or reuse potential.

Human health effects. Proximity of vulnerable populations, adjacent physical activity opportunities, proximity to major sources of air pollution.

Timeline

Like the integrative design credit, site assessment is done very on in the process so the findings can influence the design decisions of the project. It begins prior to the conceptual design, which makes sense, the goal is to have the site influence the design of the project, such as where it is sited on the property, the building orientation, etc. The architect, landscape designer, civil engineer, and owner will need to work closely together early on to gather information and make informed decisions.

Page 47: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

47

Research and Documentation

USGBC provides a spreadsheet project teams can use for the site inventory. The reference guide includes a list of sources for each of the categories to consider. For example the vegetation sources on the project you might bring in someone to physically identify the plant species, aerial maps from google maps for determining the boundaries on the site where vegetation is, species lists from the U.S. and Wildlife Service Endangered species list, local land use and zoning maps to locate stream buffers and wetlands, etc. For the other categories consider topographical maps, soil surveys, previous site assessments, and climate data. In your final narrative, project teams should identify the design opportunities impacted by the site analysis. An example might be “The northwest corner of the property is at a lower elevation where water was more likely to run off, so we located our retention pond in that quadrant. Additionally, a soil analysis and plant inventory guided the landscape architect to create a plan to restore the natural habitats for local bird populations.”

SS Credit 2 | Site Development – Protect or Restore Habitat

The intent of this credit is to conserve existing natural areas and restore damaged areas to provide habitat and promote biodiversity. All of the BD&C rating systems can earn 1 to 2 points for this credit, except for Healthcare which can earn one point. What’s new in LEED v4 is the setback requirements from LEED 2009 have been replaced with standards for preservation, and percentages to preserve and restore.

Approach

This credit has multiple approaches based on pre-existing site condition. All projects must preserve and protect 40% of the greenfield site condition from development and construction activity. In addition, projects can choose either: restore on-site 30% of previously developed total area, or financial support of a land trust off-site.

Option 1: On-Site Restoration

If you’re on a previously developed site, the goal is to restore 30% of the total site area, including building footprint, with native or adaptive plants. You can’t use nonnative plants or invasive plants, and you have to restore the soil as well to bring the land closer to its original ecosystem before it was developed.

Page 48: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

48

The soils have to meet the following criteria: Soils (imported and in situ) must be reused for functions comparable to their

original function. Imported topsoils or soil blends designed to serve as topsoil may not include the following:

soils defined regionally by the Natural Resources Conservation Service web soil survey (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.) as prime farmland, unique farmland, or farmland of statewide or local importance; or

soils from other greenfield sites, unless those soils are a byproduct of a construction process.

Restored soil must meet the criteria in categories 1 to 3 below, as well as meet either category 4 or 5:

1. organic matter 2. compaction 3. infiltration rates 4. soil biological function 5. soil chemical characteristics

In the beginning of the project you might have to bring in a local soil expert or conduct some soil analysis to see what type of soils exist around the site.

Alternative Landscapes

Projects that achieve a density of 1.5 floor-area ratio may include vegetated roof surfaces in this calculation if the plants are native or adapted, provide habitat, and promote biodiversity. Project teams may exclude vegetated landscape areas that are constructed to accommodate rainwater infiltration from the vegetation and soils requirements, provided all such rainwater infiltration areas are treated consistently with SS Credit Rainwater Management.

Option 2: Financial Support

If a project team chooses not to restore the site, or faces other barriers, the building owner can write a check to a land trust. This option is not providing land, or a donation of land, but money for land. It meets the intention of preserving habitat for the life of the building. Project teams must provide financial support equivalent to at least $0.40 per square foot ($4 U.S. per square meter) for the total site area (including the building footprint). Financial support must be provided to a nationally or locally recognized land trust or conservation organization within the same EPA Level III ecoregion or the project’s state.

Page 49: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

49

For U.S. projects, the land trust must be accredited by the Land Trust Alliance. For projects outside of the U.S., the financial support must be provided to a land trust within 100 miles of the project (160 kilometers).

Strategies

Meet local zoning requirements, or if not needed, apply for a waiver. Identify areas for vegetation. Replace paved areas with landscaped areas. That’s the key for this credit - that you’re restoring a previously developed site to a native habitat condition. On a greenfield site, you would establish non-disturbance boundaries during construction. That’s saying, “Okay, general contractor, where can you stage your equipment, your trailer, your debris bins so they’re not going to encroach on the existing habitat?” That’s part of reducing disturbance of construction activity. Heavy machinery compacts soil and weakens its ability to perform its role of filtration in the ecosystem. Consider using paved areas for staging. Furthermore, think about the building’s placement (if you have that opportunity), and even the building plan. Look at things like stacked program, tuck-under parking or sharing facilities with neighboring buildings.

Calculation Examples

Scenario 1 If you had a 20,000 sf site that was 10,000 sf previously developed and 10,000 sf greenfield, the requirements apply to both portion. First, protect 40% of the 10,000 sf greenfield area, or 4,000 sf. In addition, for the previously developed portion of the site, 30% of it must be restored, or 3,000 sf. All together, the project will contain 7,000 sf of native and adaptive landscaping, or 35% of total site area. That leaves 13,000 sf for the building footprint, parking, hardscapes, and roads. Remember, if a site contains both greenfield and previously developed conditions, it must meet both requirements. Scenario 2 A project site is 10 acres (4 hectares). 5 acres (2 hectares) of the site have been previously developed, including a 1 acre (0.4 hectare) building footprint. How much money must be contributed to a land trust? (Hint: There are 43,560 square feet in an acre, and 10,000 square meters in a hectare.) 10 x 43,560 sf x 0.4$/sf = $174,240 or 4 ha x 10,000 x 4$/ha = $160,000. For large projects, it will be more cost effective to restore on-site.

Page 50: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

50

Rating System Adaptations

In the schools rating system, dedicated athletic fields that are solely for athletic uses are exempted from the soil restoration criteria. These areas may not count toward the minimum required area.

Case Study

Ball Horticultural Company wanted to set an example for other corporations by restoring areas on their corporate headquarters in West Chicago to an ecologically stable landscape. This included improving erosion control, wildlife habitat, diversity, aesthetics, and air and water quality. In planning the project, the property was divided into a wetland mitigation area, south woods, west woods, Oak savanna, existing lawn, tall-grass prairie, and an old field. To gain acceptance within the community the company began restoration of the tall-grass prairie. This area needed the least amount of invasive plant removal and gave the quickest results with flowers blooming the following spring. To connect the prairie to the wetland, the west woods and old-field were restored next. With the opening of the canopy in the west woods, more sunlight reached the ground stimulating the growth of native trees, shrubs, wildflowers, and grasses. Seed and woody plants were installed within the woods to enhance the remnant populations. The wetland mitigation area was vegetated in a year later, and it required a DuPage County Stormwater permit. A new detention basin and the existing lawn were seeded with native species, while clearing and seeding began in the South woods as well. After installation was complete, interpretive signs were installed as well as houses for Blue Birds, Wood Ducks, and Tree Swallows.

SS Credit 3 | Open Space

The intent of this credit is to create exterior open space that encourages interaction with the environment, social interaction, passive recreation, and physical activities. It’s crucial that you differentiate credits with similar names. The last credit was called protect or restore habitat; this one is open space. What’s the difference? Both are vegetated landscapes. Open space is a generic description for any kind of tree, shrub, groundcover, water, and minimal pavement. Habitat is a specific type of landscape that supports the native ecology and habitats for indigenous plants and animals.

Page 51: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

51

Habitat is generally for the animals and not people. Open spaces must be usable to the project, as defined by the intent of the credit.

Space Requirements

The first requirement is the outdoor space must be greater than or equal 30% of the total site area, including the building footprint. A minimum of 25% of that outdoor space must be vegetated or have overhead vegetated canopy. Turf grass does not count as vegetation for this credit. Artificial turf doesn’t count, or tiny pieces of open space in the middle of a parking lot that divides rows of parking.

Quality Requirements

The outdoor space must be physically accessible and be one or more of the following: a pedestrian-oriented paving or turf area with physical site elements that

accommodate outdoor social activities;

a recreation-oriented paving or turf area with physical site elements that encourage physical activity;

a garden space with a diversity of vegetation types and species that provide opportunities for year-round visual interest;

a garden space dedicated to community gardens or urban food production;

preserved or created habitat that meets the criteria of SS Credit Site Development—Protect or Restore Habitat and also includes elements of human interaction.

Alternative Spaces

For projects that achieve a density of 1.5 floor-area ratio (FAR), extensive or intensive vegetated roofs can be used toward the minimum 25% vegetation requirement, if they are physically accessible. In addition, qualifying roof-based physically accessible paving areas can be used toward credit compliance. Wetlands or naturally designed ponds may count as open space if the side slope gradients average 1 to 4 (vertical: horizontal) or less and are vegetated.

Campus Projects with Master Plans

If the project is part of a multitenant complex or part of a master-planned location, the open space can be part of the master development or adjacent to the building as long as it won’t be developed in the future. This is an option if the open space is shared with the

Page 52: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

52

whole plan, such as a park or another outdoor space. The open space also doesn’t have to be one area. It can be a combination of adjacent open space, and other open spaces around the master plan.

Strategies for Implementation

These implementations aren’t necessarily linear; they’re a laundry list of things that you would do. Minimize the development footprint by stacking floor plans and analyzing the program needs to design only what is needed. Choose a location where construction disturbance might be minimized. It is important that the team consider how much a site and building location may affect other credits in the LEED rating system. Consider: Building orientation Significant drainage Daylighting Existing green corridors Heat Island Effect Rainwater runoff Any other possible green impacts

Design the site to preserve open space and provide connections to adjacent ecosystems. For multitenant complexes, open space does not have to be adjacent to the building, but must be preserved for the life of the building. In urban sites, make the hardscapes pedestrian oriented. Provide for recreation opportunities including pocket parks, roof decks, and courtyards. For sites using green roofs, the green roofs will require special attention to the following areas: Support Waterproofing Drainage

Green roofs have a membrane, drainage system, filter cloth, growing medium, and plants. Consider that some modular green roof systems can be purchased pre-prepared.

Page 53: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

53

Calculations

The calculations are going to be the trick for this credit. You have two percentages to keep track of. 30% of the total site must be outdoor space, and 25% of that area must be vegetated. Take the total site area and multiply it by 30%. That value is how much open space the project needs. If you had a 10 acre (4 hectare) project site, 3 acres (1.2 hectares) must be open space. 25% of 3 acres is 0.75 acres or 0.4 hectares that must be vegetated (but no turfgrass).

SS Credit 4 | Rainwater Management

The intent of this credit is to reduce runoff volume and improve water quality by replicating the natural hydrology and water balance of the site, based on historical conditions and undeveloped ecosystems in the region. Sites under their natural land cover conditions have a natural water balance that has evolved over millennium. While the precipitation amount remains constant, development alters the natural water balance. Much of our soil has been sealed and covered with impervious surfaces and rainwater is converted into runoff. This credit attempts to restore that balance. By managing rainwater with low impact development and green infrastructure, project teams can restore and re-establish the natural site water balance that existed prior to development.

Two Options

Option 1 is Percentile of rainfall events. Option 2 is Natural land cover conditions.

Option 1: Percentile of Rainfall Events

There are 3 paths for option 1, and this path is best suited for urban projects with little open space. The resulting impact is little to no runoff. Path 1, 95th percentile can earn 2 points, except for healthcare which can earn 1 point. Path 2, 98th percentile can earn 3 points, except for healthcare which can earn 2 points.

Page 54: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

54

Path 3 is for zero lot line projects only. Managing the 85th percentile can earn 3 points except for healthcare which can earn 2 points. What is the 95th percentile rainfall event? The measured precipitation depth accumulated over a 24-hour period for the period of record that ranks as the 95th percentile rainfall depth based on the range of all daily event occurrences during this period. Meaning, only 5% of all recorded events had more rain. In general, at least a 20 to 30 year period of rainfall record is recommended for such an analysis. This raw data is readily available and collected by most airports across the country. For each of these paths, project teams are trying to get into the higher percentiles of regional or local rainfall events using low-impact development and green infrastructure, by managing on site runoff from the development while replicating the natural site hydrology. Path 3 is for zero lot line projects, or projects that essentially have no ground cover on the site. The minimum density is a floor area ratio of 1.5 or greater.

Implementation

Use daily rainfall data and the methodology in the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Technical Guidance on Implementing the Stormwater Runoff Requirements for Federal Projects under Section 438 of the Energy Independence and Security Act to determine the 95th percentile amount. The 95th percentile storm would be represented by a number such as 1.5 inches, and this would be the design storm. The designer would then select a system of practices that infiltrate, evapotranspire or harvest and use this volume multiplied by the total area of the project footprint. Retaining all storms up to and including the 95th percentile storm event is analogous to maintaining or restoring the pre-development hydrology with respect to the volume, flow rate, duration and temperature of the runoff for most sites.

Option 2: Natural Land Cover Conditions

Manage on site the annual increase in runoff volume from the natural land cover condition to the post-developed condition. Option 2 is really more for project teams that have a lot of green space and open space. In that case you are looking at pre-development and post-development and managing the difference. The project team is managing the quantity and quality, where the quantity is really just the volume.

Page 55: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

55

For example, if prior to development, 25 percent of the annual rainfall runs directly into the stream and the remainder infiltrates into the ground or is evapotranspired into the air, then the post-development goal should be to limit runoff to 25 percent of the annual precipitation while maintaining the correct aquifer recharge rate. This has the benefit, in most cases, of delivering water to the stream at approximately the same rate, volume, duration and temperature as the stream had naturally evolved to receive prior to development. The result will be to eliminate or minimize the erosion of streambeds and streambanks, significantly reduce the delivery of many pollutants to water bodies, and retain historical instream temperatures.

Implementation

The volume of run-off to manage is determined by the option and path the project uses. Green infrastructure and low-impact development (GI/LID) approaches are a set of management approaches and technologies that utilize and/or mimic the natural hydrologic cycle processes of infiltration, evapotranspiration and use. GI/LID practices include green roofs, trees and tree boxes, rain gardens, vegetated swales, pocket wetlands, infiltration planters, porous and permeable pavements, vegetated median strips, reforestation and revegetation and protection of riparian buffers and floodplains. These practices can be used almost anywhere soil and vegetation can be worked into the urban or suburban landscape. They include decentralized harvesting approaches such as rain barrels and cisterns that can be used to capture and re-use rainfall for watering plants or flushing toilets. Some of these are engineered practices that may require specialized design assistance from landscape architects or civil engineers. Many of these strategies you are probably already familiar with, and they can help with other LEED credits. A vegetated roof is one of the best examples – it reduces rainwater, it counts as open space, it reduces energy use.

Green Infrastructure

Green infrastructure is a soil- and vegetation-based approach to wet weather management that is cost-effective, sustainable, and environmentally friendly. Green infrastructure management strives to infiltrate, evapotranspire, capture and reuse stormwater to maintain or restore natural hydrologies. Design approaches and technologies preserve rainwater flows, reduce impervious areas, minimize and mitigate rainwater runoff. Recovered rainwater can be used to replace potable water for: Irrigation fire suppression toilet flushing custodial uses

Page 56: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

56

In in urban setting projects can’t replicate natural hydrology. What project teams have to do is remove the excess volume from the runoff. Rainwater harvesting techniques allow the water to be removed and not directed downstream to where it would cause problems.

Site Design

If a project team is targeting a specific rainfall amount, say 2 inches of rainfall, the first step is to determine what that rainfall does when it lands on the site. This credit ties into the Site Assessment credit to understand the hydrology of the site, and analyzing the site – the typography, vegetation, soils, etc. This information helps to understand how the site worked in its natural form to help decide how the rainwater can be managed. When planning the site use, preserve as much of the existing natural site as possible. Rainfall that lands on the natural areas is being captured onsite - its one less raindrop to worry about. Protect the site’s steep slopes so rainwater doesn’t come rushing down it. During development consider how the preserve the soils from being compacted, and protecting the existing trees and vegetation. Think about how to minimize the development footprint in your design phase – clustering the development, building up instead of out, reducing frontage and setbacks. The most popular low impact development strategy is pervious pavement. Parking lots are huge barriers to natural infiltration and installing permeable concrete or open-grid paving would reduce runoff compared to traditional parking lots.

Case Study

Portland, Oregon. A 27-acre site with 95% impervious area. If the 95th percentile rainfall event (1.0 inches) occurred on the existing site (i.e., no control measures), 0.86 inches of runoff would be generated and require management. Given these site conditions, there was not enough pervious area to manage the entire runoff volume discharged by the 95th percentile rainfall event with bioretention. As a result, other practices were evaluated and selected. The practices integrated into the design included a green roof, cisterns, and porous pavement. Based on the technical considerations of constructing and maintaining control measures at the site, it was assumed that approximately 30% of the available pervious area could be converted into bioretention cells; 20% of total rooftop area could be converted into green roofs; 40% of paved area could be converted into paver blocks; and 50,000 gallons of total volume could be captured in cisterns for use on this urbanized site. Using this system of four different practices, all runoff for the 95th percentile rainfall event would be retained.

Page 57: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

57

SS Credit 5 | Heat Island Reduction

The intent of this credit is to minimize effects on microclimates and human and wildlife habitats by reducing heat islands. The idea is that the built environment retains a great deal of heat from the sun, and that negatively impacts your building’s energy performance, in addition to creating an uncomfortable outdoor space. When the horizontal hardscape retains heat, it also radiates heat onto nearby vertical surfaces like walls. When the sun’s rays hit your building’s roof, heat transfers into your building and requires more energy to cool. It’s a vicious cycle of heat transfer

Two Options

The heat island reduction credit has two options, and project teams may pursue both. Option 1 Non-roof and Roof, addresses horizontal surfaces and requires reflective hardscape or roof materials. Option 2 Parking Under Cover, addresses the undesirability of surface parking lots.

Option 1: Non-roof and Roof

Option 1: Non-roof and Roof requires project teams to use any combination of strategies that reduce heat islands. The surface area of compliant strategies get plugged into a spreadsheet to see if the goals are met. Your strategies span three types: the area of the non-roof measures, area of high-reflectance roof, and area of vegetated roof, the sum of which needs to be greater than or equal to the total site paving area and total roof area.

Are of non‐roof 

measures 

Area of high 

reflectance roof 

Area of 

vegetated roof  ≥ Total site 

paving area + 

Total roof 

area 0.5  0.75  0.75 

You can see by the equation greater weight is given to the roofing areas (75% versus 50%). Keep that in mind when you are doing your design.

Page 58: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

58

Non-roof Strategies

What are some of the non-roof measures a project team should consider? Minimize hardscape

Use the existing plant material or install plants that provide shade over paving areas (including playgrounds) on the site within 10 years of planting. Install vegetated planters. Plants must be in place at the time of occupancy permit and cannot include artificial turf.

Provide shade with structures covered by energy generation systems, such as solar thermal collectors, photovoltaics, and wind turbines.

Provide shade with architectural devices or structures that have a three-year aged solar reflectance (SR) value of at least 0.28. If three-year aged value information is not available, use materials with an initial SR of at least 0.33 at installation,

Provide shade with vegetated structures.

Use paving materials with a three-year aged solar reflectance value of at least 0.28. If three- year aged value information is not available, use materials with an initial SR of at least 0.33 at installation.

Use an open-grid pavement system (at least 50% unbound).

Roof Strategies

Use roofing materials that have an SRI equal to or greater than the values in this table.

  Slope  Initial SRI  3‐yr ages SRI 

Low‐sloped roof  ≤ 2:12  82  64 

Steep‐slope roof  > 2:12  39  32 

Additionally the requirements want you to seek out products that have an aged SRI value. While a nice shiny new white roof may have an initial SRI of 82, after 3 years of being in the sun, being rained on, collecting dust and dirt, the SRI may decrease. Since some projects might not have this information published, if three-year aged value information is not available, use materials that meet the initial SRI value. You can still use the product if the three-year aged value is not available, but the performance of the roof might not be what you think it should be 3 years down the road. This is why when you are reviewing products, try to find one with a 3-year SRI value. Projects can also install a vegetated roof to help meet the requirements.

Page 59: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

59

Option 2: Parking Under Cover

The second option is to place a minimum of 75% of parking spaces under cover. Parking underground, under deck, or under building complies with the intent. Motorcycle parking counts as a vehicle parking space, while bicycle spaces do not. Any roof used to shade or cover parking must: Have a three-year aged SRI of at least 32 (if three-year aged value information is

not available, use materials with an initial SRI of at least 39 at installation) Be a vegetated roof Be covered by energy generation systems, such as solar thermal collectors,

photovoltaics, and wind turbines

Implementation

Use a combination of strategies, starting with minimizing the development footprint. Limit the amount of impervious hardscape,

Utilize light-colored paving surfaces,

Include a building parking deck or underground parking

Plant vegetation that will provide shade

Open grid paving

There are a lot of measures to use to earn this credit, and since they can be used in combination with each other it should be a no-brainer to try to attempt this credit. If an area meets one or more criteria you would only count the area once Use durable high reflective and emissive materials. Check the manufacturing data carefully for information on the material. Manufacturer data is preferred for submission for this credit. Also refer to the LBNL Cool Roofing Material Database. Note that reflective roofs may increase the heating costs of a building in cooler weather. A vegetated roof absorbs heat and provides insulation. These types of roofs require semi-annual inspection (2 times yearly), but they tend to last longer than conventional roofs. Green roofs can absorb stormwater and the thermal insulation also help reduce HVAC and cooling costs.

Calculation Example

A site has 100,000 sq. ft. in hardscapes, and 25,000 sq. ft. of the hardscapes have been replaced with pervious pavement that has an initial SR of 0.33. The same 25,000 sq. ft. will also be shaded with new trees. The building has a 30,000 sq. ft. low-sloped roof with an initial SRI value 85. Will the project as designed earn Sustainable Sites Credit, Heat Island Reduction? The key here is the compliant hardscape surfaces are the same 25,000 square feet.

Page 60: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

60

Compliant surfaces: (25,000 / 0.5) + (30,000 + 0.75) = 50,000 + 40,000 = 90,000 Total surfaces: 100,000 + 30,000 = 130,000 Compliant surfaces are not greater than or equal to total surfaces, therefore, this project cannot earn the credit as designed.

SS Credit 6 | Light Pollution Reduction

The intent of this credit is to increase night sky access, improve nighttime visibility, and reduce the consequences of development for wildlife and people. Light pollution due to uplighting or tresspass can cause annoyance, discomfort, distraction, or loss of visibility. This credit is a champion for the bats and possums and all nocturnal creatures to thrive just as we humans do in daytime.

Exterior Lighting Factors

This credit addresses three exterior lighting factors: uplighting, light trespass, and internally illuminated signs. Uplighting is any light emitted above the horizontal plane of the fixture. Light trespass is light extending beyond the lighting boundary. Both are considered obtrusive illumination that is unwanted because of quantitative, directional, or spectral attributes. There are two options to comply with the first two factors: calculations or the prescriptive path. The prescriptive path allows teams to demonstrate compliance by selecting luminaires with an appropriate BUG rating and placing them appropriately. These optional paths do not require point-by-point calculations. Many projects can achieve the credit by simply selecting luminaires with an appropriate BUG rating. The signage requirement specifies two levels of luminance allowed for either daytime or nighttime hour.

BUG Method

The BUG acronym stands for Backlight Up-light and Glare. BUG is a luminaire classification system that classifies luminaires in terms of back-light (B), uplight (U) and glare (G) (taken from IES/IDA Model Lighting Ordinance). Designers using this option will be looking through light fixture specifications for BUG ratings that master lighting zone, allowing them to avoid spending time with these complicated photometric plans. The BUG method is a luminaire classification system

Page 61: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

61

that uses subdivided zones and outdoor luminaires for providing a standard for measuring and reporting fixture data for compliance of light pollution and restrictions. Your BUG option is going to be much easier – you purchase luminaires that have certain ratings, and install them in appropriate places. It’s like doing prescriptive requirements for energy, almost like a checklist that doesn’t require somebody with a specialty to be on the team. The calculation method is going to require someone to do lighting measurements and calculations, and take a lot more time to do. Project teams can use different options for the uplight and light trespass, meaning you can use the BUG method for uplight and then use the calculation method for trespass, or vice versa.

Lighting Zone

The referenced standard just mentioned is the IES/IDA Model Lighting Ordinance, which is where the BUG method is taken from. The lighting zone of the project property (at the time construction begins) must be classified using the lighting zones definitions provided in the Illuminating Engineering Society and International Dark Sky Association (IES/IDA) Model Lighting Ordinance (MLO) User Guide.

Lighting Zone  Definition  Description 

LZ0  No ambient lighting  Wilderness 

LZ1  Low   Single family residential 

LZ2  Moderate  Commercial business 

LZ3  Moderately high  Shopping mall 

LZ4  High ambient lighting  Times square, NY, NY 

Each zone is going to have its own set of requirements for illumination. Look at the list and you can see that as the quantity or density of people in an area increases, the greater the amount of light trespass is allowed in the area. Be careful with your lighting zone selection. You need to backup your selection to the LEED reviewers, because you might be questioned on it. Some project teams in the past have picked a lighting zone that wasn’t appropriate for the site.

Establish Scope

After you identify your lighting zone, you need to determine your lighting boundary. Typically, it is identical to the LEED project boundary, but in certain cases, it can be moved to the center line of an adjacent street for safety purposes. Next, inventory all

Page 62: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

62

exterior lights, including mounting heights. Collect data on fixture characteristics like: manufacturer, model, lamp type, orientation, tilt angle, and input wattage. Then, determine and document any exempt fixtures. Project teams may exempt fixtures for purposes like: emergency lighting, government-mandated roadway lighting, theatrical lighting, and lighting of the national flag. Finally, decide whether the project will pursue the calculation or BUG method of compliance. All projects must provide a site lighting plan.

Uplighting Compliance

Based on lighting zone, meet the requirements identified in the reference guide for maximum percentage of total lumens emitted about the horizontal. Manufacturer data or cutsheets will provided the necessary information. In general terms, look for fixtures classified as ‘full cut-off’ meaning that there is a shield over the bulb which directs the light at the ground rather than up into the clouds.

Trespass Compliance

When using the BUG option do not exceed the luminaire and backlight and glare ratings as defined in IES TM-15-11 Addendum A. There is a table in the reference guide that lists the allowed ratings depending on the MLO lighting zone. For the calculation method of light trespass, create a photometric site plan and do not exceed vertical illuminance thresholds at the lighting boundary. Calculation points may be no more than five feet apart, and must extend 33 feet above grade level.

SS School Credit | Site Master Plan

This credit applies to schools only and is worth 1 point. The intent of this credit is to ensure that the sustainable site benefits achieved by the project continue, regardless of future changes in programs or demographics. A site master plan, by the LEED definition, is an overall design or development concept for the project and associated (or potentially associated) buildings and sites. The plan considers future expansion of structures, parking, landscape, and demolition. The site master plan is typically illustrated, with building plans (if applicable), site drawings of planned phased development, and narrative descriptions.

Page 63: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

63

Requirements

For this credit your project must achieve at least four out of these six credits: LT Credit: High Priority Site SS Credit: Site Development—Protect or Restore Habitat SS Credit: Open Space SS Credit: Rainwater Management SS Credit: Heat Island Reduction SS Credit: Light Pollution Reduction

All of the credits must be recalculated using the data from the master plan. The plan needs to be developed in collaboration with the school board or other decision making body, and include not only the current construction but plans for any future construction as well. You need to consider how student enrollment is going to grow 5 or 10 years from now and into the future. The master plan development footprint must include parking, paving, and utilities. Master plans should consider plans for community centers, fields, libraries, parks, wetlands, and other major projects. Strategically develop a master plan to evaluate future expansion. Involve decision makers and local municipalities during early stages. Review geographic and demographic information to determine factors that may affect expansion. Incorporate flexibility in the master plan to accommodate for a range of scenarios

Calculations

The calculations are the same as for the 4 credits that your project will achieve to earn the credit. For example if your project earned SS Credit Heat Island Reduction, you would run the calculations for the entire area of the site master plan, not just the project building’s area. For example, if the master plan is 100 acres (40 hectares), but the project building area is only 20 acres (8 hectares), the heat island calculations would be done using 100 acres (40 hectares).

SS School Credit | Joint Use of Facilities

This credit applies to Schools only and can earn one point. The intent is to integrate the school with the community by sharing the building and its playing fields for non-school sponsored events and functions. This credit covers how a school can share facilities with the community and vice versa. What that does is share existing facilities, reducing the demand for more construction, thus preserving natural resources. Imagine boy and girls scouts meeting in elementary school classroom afterhours. Imagine the high school swim team using a university pool for practice. Joint use is already happening, and this LEED credit promotes its longevity.

Page 64: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

64

Three Options

Option 1 is to make the LEED building space open to the general public Option 2 is to contract with specific organizations to share space within the

LEED building. Option 3 is for the LEED building to use shared space owned by other

organizations.

Option 1: Share On-site Facilities

Option 1 is to share school spaces with the community. Sports fields are great examples of spaces that get under-used at most schools. Most schools do not have games on the weekends, and practice ends around 5p.m. during the weekdays. There is a lot of idle time fields have. The school would need to make available at least three of the following: Auditorium

Gymnasium

Cafeteria

1 or more classrooms

Playing fields and stadiums

Joint parking

Option 2: Share Space with Third Party

Option 2 is to contract with specific organizations to share building space. If you are designing a new school you may consider putting in a space for a community service, such as a police station. For this option a contract is required that provides at least 2 dedicated-use spaces such as: Commercial office

Health clinic

Community service centers

Police offices

Library / media center

Parking lot

One or more commercial sector businesses

Option 3: Share Off-site Facilities

The third option is to find services off of the school property and enter into an agreement that would provide student access. Why build a natatorium onsite when there could be a

Page 65: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

65

YMCA or health club down the street that already has a swimming pool available for use? Two of the following six spaces are needed: Auditorium

Gymnasium

Cafeteria

1 or more classrooms

swimming pools, and

Playing fields and stadiums

These require pedestrian access from the school. An example might be a community center that is in walking distance from the school and provides the students access to an auditorium after school so the students can practice for the upcoming play.

Requirements

Prior to selecting a site, get agreements with the community to share facilities. It may be possible to share construction costs. The security of the school needs to be a priority if public access is going to occur. Restrooms must be available at the school if the community will be coming to the school to access the facilities. To find out more about joint use agreements that apply to Option 1, the state of California has published a toolkit for increasing physical activity through joint use agreements. You can google the title of the document shown on this slide.

SS Core and Shell Credit | Tenant Design and Construction Guidelines

This credit applies to core and shell only and is worth 1 point. The intent is to educate tenants in implementing sustainable design and construction features in their tenant improvement build-outs. The goal of establishing Tenant Design and Construction Guidelines is for future tenants to complete their interior fit-out with LEED compliant features, and if desired, streamline pursuit of LEED Commercial Interiors certification. The guidelines also serve to educate tenants about how to take advantage of the sustainable features of the core and shell building host. If you didn’t know that the electrical infrastructure was designed for enhanced controls or HVAC zoning, you may not design your space to utilize its full potential. It is essentially a user-friendly manual that tells you all the design and construction team has done to achieve LEED certification, and all the steps they have done that will help you achieve LEED Commercial Interiors certification.

Page 66: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

66

Keep in mind that a tenant sales and lease agreement is not enough to satisfy the requirements of this credit. You must write guidelines specifically referencing LEED and the requirements in this credit. The guidelines only have to be provided to all tenants. The tenants do not actually have to comply with the guidelines, unless you build that into your lease agreement. For the purposes of this credit, the guidelines need only be created and distributed.

Requirements

The guide assists tenants to understand the building systems and capitalize on what’s been done already. The reference guide contains a list of 20 specific credits that must be referenced. The guidelines must cover the base building systems: Water Use

Optimizing Energy Performance

Lighting Power

Lighting Controls

HVAC

Energy Use & Metering

The guide needs to be an illustrated document, with descriptions, recommendations, examples, products, materials, and services. When you discuss indoor water use reduction in the guide, include some product recommendations that will reduce indoor water use. The guidelines can include product and material recommendations. If the project team has built out the lobby of the building and installed particular LED lightbulbs, a particular brand of toilet in the common areas, or used a specific carpet in the lobby, those are all products that can be recommended.

SS Healthcare Credit | Places of Respite

This credit applies to healthcare only and is worth 1 point. The intent is to provide patients, staff, and visitors with the health benefits of the natural environment by creating outdoor places of respite on the healthcare campus. The natural environment displays a cycle of life that brings life’s beginnings, events and closures into perspective. Seasonal cycles of plant life, cycles of the sun and moon, and life cycles, often evade our notice. Interaction with these natural cycles of life is a proven relaxant in times of stress, including many of the experiences commonly associated with the hospital environment of care.

Page 67: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

67

The physical and mental health of medical staff and clinicians is key to successful patient outcomes. The environment of care plays a role in staff health and may be leveraged as both a recruitment and retention tool. Reducing staff stress and fatigue through a healing and supportive environment may be achieved through application of evidence-based concepts such as places of respite in health care design.

Space Requirements

Provide places of respite that are accessible to patients and visitors, equal to 5% of the net usable program area of the building. Provide additional dedicated places of respite for staff, equal to 2% of the net usable program area of the building. The key here is a dedicated portion just for staff; that’s 7% total. The net usable program area is the sum of all interior areas in the project available to house the project's program. It does not include areas for building equipment, vertical circulation, or structural components.

Types of Place

Places of respite can be outdoors, such as… Healing Gardens

Meditative Gardens

Restorative, Rehabilitative, and Enabling gardens

Green roof and rooftop gardens

Staff gardens with sitting areas

Space for Programs of Care, such as Horticultural Therapy, Group and Physical therapy

Or, a quiet green space with a bench

or be located indoors, such as: Interior atria and greenhouse gardens

Wide corridors that offer seating with views of nature and seasonal variations

Places to pause with seating adjacent to destination points

Display areas of flora and fauna

Family consultation spaces with views

Meditation spaces, chapels or grieving rooms

Resource areas and libraries with seating

Exercise and therapy spaces

Page 68: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

68

Such interior spaces may be used to meet up to 30% of the required area, if 90% of each qualifying space’s gross floor area achieves a direct line of sight to unobstructed views of nature.

Quality of Place

All areas must meet the following requirements. The area is accessible from within the building or located within 200 feet (60

meters) of a building entrance or access point.

The area is located where no medical intervention or direct medical care is delivered.

Options for shade or indirect sun are provided, with at least one seating space per 200 square feet (18.5 square meters) of each respite area, with one wheelchair space per five seating spaces.

Horticulture therapy and other specific clinical or special-use gardens unavailable to all building occupants may account for no more than 50% of the required area.

Universal-access natural trails that are available to visitors, staff, or patients may account for no more than 30% of the required area, provided the trailhead is within 200 feet (60 meters) of a building entrance.

Additionally, outdoor areas must meet the following requirements. A minimum of 25% of the total outdoor area must be vegetated at the ground

plane (not including turf grass) or have overhead vegetated canopy.

The area is open to fresh air, the sky, and the natural elements.

Signage must meet the 2010 FGI Guidelines for Design and Construction of Health Care Facilities

Places of respite may not be within 25 feet (7.6 meters) of a smoking area (see IEQ Prerequisite Environmental Tobacco Smoke Control).

SS Healthcare Credit | Direct Exterior Access

This credit applies to Healthcare only and can earn one point. The intent is to provide patients and staff with the health benefits associated with direct access to the natural environment. This credit goes is complimentary with the previous credit, Places of Respite. The difference in Direct Access is that patients are provided with an outdoor opportunity adjacent to their room. Direct access means entering an exterior space without having to leave the floor or pass through another patient's room, dedicated staff space, service or utility space, or major

Page 69: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

69

public space. Patients' and public circulation corridors, common sitting areas, and waiting and day space may be part of a direct access route.

Requirement

The total size of the space depends on the number of patients the hospital can accommodate and must provide direct access to an exterior courtyard, terrace, garden, or balcony. The space must be at least 5 square feet (0.5 square meters) per patient for 75% of all inpatients and 75% of qualifying outpatients whose clinical length of stay (LOS) exceeds four hours.

Calculation Example

A hospital has 50 hospital beds for inpatients, and can accommodate 50 outpatient procedures whose length of stay exceeds 4 hours. How much exterior access is necessary to earn SS Credit Direct Exterior Access? The requirements call for 5 square feet (0.5 square meters) per patient for 75% of all inpatients, and 75% of qualifying outpatients whose clinical length of stay exceeds four hours. [(50 x 0.75) + (50 x 0.75)] x 5 sqft = 375 sqft

Case Study

Dell Children’s Medical Center of Central Texas, Austin, TX The 169-bed, 455,000 square foot Dell Children’s Medical Center in Austin, Texas, on the 750-acre “brownfield” site of the former Robert Mueller Municipal Airport, is striving to become the first hospital in the world to achieve platinum-level LEED certification. The project design incorporates outdoor places of respite in two ways: several enclosed courtyards and a three-acre healing garden surrounding the Inpatient Units that was fully funded by outside sources. The healing garden offers a multi-functional experience for a variety of users. These include areas for private solace and elements for reflection and communication, such as the Reflecting Pond and the Labyrinth. Several areas also provide exterior exposure for patients in beds with telemetry. Walking paths for exercise and larger gathering areas for social interactions support the physical and social needs of the healing environment. The design intent for the healing garden emphasized views of seasonal and day-night changes highlighting dimensional variations and areas of interest through discrete low-level lighting. The use of regional, indigenous plants and materials allowed for a xeriscape landscape design to limit the irrigation requirements within the garden.

Page 70: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

70

The healing courtyard is a large, four-level exterior space within the footprint of the facility used as a place of respite and as a wayfinding orientation element. This courtyard is both visible and accessible from public spaces and viewed from the patient towers. In addition, every level of the hospital has bed access to one of the four levels of this courtyard. The central focal design feature, a four level waterfall, provides sound and movement throughout the courtyard. Materials on each level reflect geology of regions of Central Texas served by the Children’s Hospital. Landscaping also reflects the typical plantings found in these geologic regions, a source of comfort to patients and their families. One of the smaller courtyards is dedicated to Outpatient Physical Therapy. Accessed from the department, this courtyard features a walking path with varied surfaces, ramps, and steps for gate therapy and training. The Physical Therapy swimming pool also opens onto this courtyard.

Sustainable Site Synergies

Let’s look at some synergies between credits and prerequisites. Synergies are single actions you can take that help you achieve more than one prerequisite or credit. USGBC wants to know your ability to recognize synergies. It is especially important to know the related credits for every prerequisite and how there may be synergies between them, since the prerequisites are required for your project. First consider SS Prerequisite Construction Activity Pollution Prevention. It’s important to think of which credits these are related to. If you are asked to do some type of analysis, you're going to show well -rounded knowledge of a particular prerequisite or credit. In this case, you would be showing how this credit may overlap with another.

Page 71: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

71

Key Terms | Sustainable Sites

Erosion Sedimentation Ecosystem Services Erosion And Sedimentation Control Plan (ESC) EPA Construction General Permit (CGP) National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) Track-Out Stabilization Fertilizer Discharge Earth Dike Terracing Riprap Silt Fence Phase I ESA Pump And Treat Solar Detoxification Using Bioreactors Land Farming In-Situ Remediation Human Health Effects In Situ Organic Matter Compaction Infiltration Rates Land Trust EPA Level III Ecoregion

Turf Grass Pedestrian-Oriented Paving Side Slope Gradients Roof Membrane Growing Medium Natural Hydrology Impervious Surfaces Zero Lot Line Natural Land Cover Condition Evapotranspire Riparian Buffers Vegetated Swales Low-Impact Development (LID) Heat Island SRI Solar Thermal Collectors Open Grid Paving Uplighting Light Trespass BUG Rating IES/IDA Model Lighting Ordinance Lighting Zone Tilt Angle Input Wattage Full Cut-Off Tenant Design And Construction Guidelines Atria Horticulture Therapy Direct Access

Page 72: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

72

Chapter 5 – Water Efficiency

Overview

Water efficiency relates to not only water consumption and potable water but also indirectly to saving energy, water recycling, and feedback mechanisms. The Water Efficiency credit category has 3 prerequisites and 4 credits. Three of the credits build upon the prerequisite requirements and offer points for increased levels of achievement. WE Prerequisite Outdoor Water Use Reduction

WE Credit Outdoor Water Use Reduction can earn up to 2 points

WE Prerequisite Indoor Water Use Reduction

WE Credit Indoor Water Use Reduction can earn up to 6 points

WE Prerequisite building-level water metering

WE Credit Water metering can earn one point

WE Credit Cooling Tower Water Use can earn up to 2 points.

WE Prerequisite 1 | Outdoor Water Use Reduction 30%

This is a new prerequisite in LEED v4, and shows LEED’s commitment to transforming the built environment. The intent is to reduce outdoor water consumption for landscaping needs. The prerequisite has two options: Option 1 No Irrigation Required and Option 2 Reduced Irrigation.

Option 1: No irrigation

The big idea for option one is to design your landscape to not require permanent irrigation system. This reduces your water demand by 100%. Projects are allowed to install a temporary system for up to 2 years to allow the plants to get established.

Option 2: 30% Reduction

Option two requires reducing the project’s landscape water requirements by at least 30% from the calculated baseline for the site’s peak watering month. Reductions are calculated using the EPA WaterSense Budget Tool. The nice thing about this new prerequisite is all projects are going to be held to the same standard. In the past projects would create their own baseline and prepare their design

Page 73: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

73

based on that, and it would have been easier to massage the numbers to get more points. Now the EPA WaterSense Budget Tool is used which calculates your baseline for you.

Plant Selection Strategies

To design a landscape that doesn’t require irrigation, you must utilize the practices of Xeriscaping to design efficiency into the site from day one. Xeriscaping is offered as a course in the GBES catalog if you are interested to go deep into the principles and strategies of designing a landscape that uses little to no water. The primary driver for efficiency is choosing appropriate plant species for the climate the building is in, because those are the types of plants that will thrive under the local soil conditions and weather patterns. Planting native and adaptive plant species, and no turf grass, are your best choices. In cooler climates turf grass can be installed that would do well without watering. If you compare the northern United States to the southern United States, you’ll find a lot more outdoor sprinkler systems installed in commercial and residential properties in the south. In the warmer climates, there are greater opportunities for reducing outdoor water use.

Irrigation Design Strategies

For Option 2, reductions must be achieved through plant species selection and irrigation system efficiency. Note that for the prerequisite, reductions using alternative water sources such as rainwater, gray water, or recycled water are not part of the reductions. Alternative water sources can be used for reductions in the credit calculations, which we will see coming up. Non-native plants and even invasive plants can be used to achieve this credit, but they are not good choices. You could actually plant the entire property with a single species of turf grass, as long as the watering is done with non-potable water. This credit doesn’t restrict your plant choice like SS Credit Site Development does when restoring habitat. For your irrigation system, choose micro or drip irrigation. Sensors and timers should be used to water when the landscape needs it, rather than on a fixed schedule. Conventional, ie. wasteful systems are known by names such as conventional spray or circular irrigation systems.

Process

This prerequisite should be part of the water analysis of the Integrative Process credit if project teams are pursuing that credit. The landscape and irrigation team members will take the lead role in coming up with ideas of how best to implement this credit for your particular site and the region it is located in. The EPA WaterSense Budget tool can be

Page 74: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

74

used to test the landscape design to see how it performs and what kind of water reduction can be achieved with different strategies. When using the tool, only include vegetated areas. Exclude hardscapes and non-vegetative softscapes, such as mulch paths. The calculator will ask teams to select low, medium, or high-water demand for each plant type. This information can be found in local plant guides, state agricultural extension services, or nurseries. If a portion of the landscape area requires no irrigation, then the calculator must be completed separately for the irrigation section and the non-irrigated section. Then the results must be added together.

Sample Question

What is allowed to be used to reduce a project’s landscape water requirement for WE Prerequisite Outdoor water use reduction? Choose 2 answers. A. Smart scheduling technologies B. Rainwater C. Plant species D. Irrigation system efficiency This prerequisite requires reducing the project’s total potable water requirement by at least 30% from the calculated baseline for the site’s peak watering month. Reductions can only be achieved through plant species selection and irrigation system efficiency, which reduce total water demand, not just potable water consumption. The correct answers are C and D. You may have thought about selecting choice A, smart scheduling technologies. While scheduling can help reduce outdoor water use, it isn’t a consistent reduction of demand based on landscape design. The efficiency of an irrigation system is different than the scheduling of when the system is run. A system that is smart enough to know not to run until 48 hours have lapsed after the last rain event may still not have an efficient watering system.

WE Credit 1 | Outdoor Water Use Reduction

This credit builds upon the prerequisite and has two options. Option 1 No Irrigation required can earn 2 points, except for Healthcare which can earn 1 point. Option 2 Reduced irrigation can earn 1 to 2 points, except for healthcare which can earn 1 point.

Option 1: No Irrigation

The requirements for option 1 are the same as for the prerequisite. Project teams that show the landscape has no permanent irrigation system, beyond the 2 year maximum for

Page 75: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

75

establishment, have met the requirements for both the prerequisite and credit, and can then earn the points for the credit.

Option 2: 50% Reduction

The prerequisite requirement of a 30% reduction must be achieved through plant selection and irrigation efficiency only. Above and beyond the 30% for the prerequisite, project teams can use a combination of design efficiency, alternative water sources, and scheduling technologies. That’s going to be key in your implementation to earn this credit properly. The first 30% comes from plant selection and design, beyond that it can be alternative sources of water, like rainwater or graywater, and smart scheduling technologies. Project teams that have a 50% reduction can earn one point. Projects that have a 100% reduction of potable water can earn 2 points (except for Healthcare).

Alternative Water Sources

Use non-potable water to earn this credit, such as graywater and rainwater. Non-vegetated surfaces, such as permeable or impermeable pavement, should be excluded from landscape area calculations. Athletic fields and playgrounds (if vegetated) and food gardens may be included or excluded at the project team’s discretion. When using alternative water sources one of the concerns that should be tested for is salinity, which in arid regions can cause salt buildup, and eventually harming the soil.

Scheduling Technologies

WaterSense labeled irrigation controllers, which act like a thermostat for your sprinkler system telling it when to turn on and off, use local weather and landscape conditions to tailor watering schedules to actual conditions on the site. Instead of irrigating using a controller with a clock and a preset schedule, WaterSense labeled controllers allow watering schedules to better match plants' real-time water needs. With proper installation, programming, and maintenance, owners can use WaterSense labeled controllers instead of standard clock-timer controllers on their existing systems, and no longer worry about wasted water. When smart irrigation controls are used that meet WaterSense criteria, they automatically result in a 15% reduction from the baseline water use. This makes it easier to get to the 50% reduction. The prerequisite requires a 30% reduction, and if you use WaterSense smart irrigation systems you are already at a 45% reduction for the credit without doing anything else.

Page 76: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

76

Sample Question

What area should be excluded from landscape area calculations for WE Credit Outdoor Water Use Reduction? A. Permeable pavement B. Food garden C. Vegetated playground D. Athletic field Nonvegetated surfaces, such as permeable or impermeable pavement, should be excluded from landscape area calculations. Athletic fields and playgrounds (if vegetated) and food gardens may be included or excluded at the project team’s discretion. Choice A is the correct answer.

Case Study

When the Las Vegas MGM Grand Hotel opened its doors in 1993, it was reported to use more water than any other property on the strip. When the water usage was investigated, they found that the amount of water the guests were using was actually quite modest in comparison to other properties. The largest consumer of water was found to be the landscaping. It was easy to understand as over 85 percent of the property was covered with turf, plants, and flowers requiring 60 gallons of water per square foot per year. As Nevada is one of the driest and drought prone areas of the country, the facility converted to xeriscaping. Following the principles of Xeriscaping, architects created a detailed plan. In considering the path of the sun, workers relocated plants from the southern and western exposures that were requiring more water and experiencing high water loss. Appropriate desert plants and ground materials were chosen based on their low need for water. The hotel removed more than 20,000 square feet of turf, converting it to rock mulch. All parking lot planters were replaced with water-wise landscape. Managers of the project also took several other xeriscaping principles under consideration when implementing the changes to the Las Vegas MGM Grand Hotel. Plant slope and grade of property were taken under consideration during the design phase. Large efforts to prepare the soil in an appropriate manner aided in supporting healthy plant life as well as ensuring the soil had a proper balance of soil clusters, sand and pore spaces to optimize water usage. To insure efficient irrigation and ease of continued maintenance, an irrigation system was installed that would allow the plants to thrive without wasting water. Over 1.5 acres of

Page 77: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

77

shrub-landscaped areas were converted from spray irrigation to drip irrigation in an effort to save 80 percent of the water being used. They further increased their water efficiency by using two water wells to supply water to the cooling tower for air conditioning, irrigate the landscape and operate its water feature, amounting to about 120 million gallons of water per year. Currently more than half of the total acreage at the MGM Grand and the surrounding land owned by parent company MGM Mirage has been converted to xeriscaping. Their efforts are largely successful. Follow up water audits have revealed a two-thirds reduction in water use, from 60 gallons to 20 gallons of water per square foot per year.

WE Prerequisite 2 | Indoor Water Use Reduction 20%

This prerequisite has requirements for building water use, appliance and process water use, and standards for processes. Specifically, it concerns restroom fixtures inside the building, water heating appliances, as well as cooling towers and condensers. The prerequisite requires a 20 percent reduction beyond a baseline.

Requirement

All eligible newly installed toilets, urinals, private lavatory faucets, and showerheads must be WaterSense labeled.

Referenced Standards

The Energy Policy Act of 1992 (EPAct) and the Energy Policy Act of 2005 set the rates for comparison of the baseline fixtures and fittings. All newly installed toilets, urinals, private lavatory faucets, and showerheads that are eligible for labeling must be WaterSense labeled (or a local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.). WaterSense is a partnership program sponsored by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency that helps consumers identify and choose water-efficient products. WaterSense labeled products are verified to be high-performing, water-efficient fixtures and exceed the IPC standards. For projects outside of the U.S. look for acceptable substitutes that have equivalent performance.

Page 78: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

78

Two Compliance Paths

There are two paths for the prerequisite – a prescriptive path and a usage-based calculation. If your project is going to attempt to earn points under the corresponding credit, you will have to do the calculations. The prescriptive path is intended for projects to just meet the prerequisites. As long as each fixture does not exceed the WaterSense maximum levels, your project would comply with the prescriptive requirements. For the calculations of the building water use, fixture selection must demonstrate 20 percent less water use than the baseline. That’s the key term here –baseline. In fact, if you were building a new building, you would have to have a baseline because you don’t know how much water this building uses, since it hasn’t been built. The process is to define a baseline case, and then build a design case based on the fixtures you’re going to install. Calculations must aggregate all of the fixtures to get a 20% reduction. It’s ok if some of the fixtures are over, as long as in total, there is a 20% reduction. This allows a bit more flexibility.

Baseline Fixture Usages Rates

Your baseline use of water consumption for fixtures and fittings is shown in this table here. It addresses toilets, urinals, faucets, and showerheads. The baselines are given in both IP units and SI units for projects in other countries. You should be familiar with these values for your exam.

Fixture and Fitting  Baseline (IP units)  Baseline (SI units) 

Toilet (water closet)  1.6 gpf  6 lpf 

Urinal  1.0 gpf  3.8 lpf 

Public Lavatory (faucet)  0.5 gpm (at 60 psi)  1.9 lpm (at 415 kPa) 

Private Lavatory (faucet)  2.2 gpm (at 60 psi)  8.3 lpm (at 415 kPA) 

Kitchen Faucet  2.2 gpm (at 60 psi)  8.3 lpm (at 415 kPA) 

Showerhead  2.5 gpm (at 80 psi)  9.5 lpm (at 550 kPa) 

Note that in your documentation a private lavatory faucet is private only in reference to hotels or when a hospital room has a private restroom. Everything else is considered public. What happens in some projects is the CEO or the dean of a school has a restroom that is just for their use with their own sink, and while it may be a private restroom for just that person LEED considers it a public restroom. It’s public because the private baseline is a lot higher and not intended for use in those circumstances. Not making that distinction can end up jeopardizing the project’s 20% baseline.

Page 79: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

79

Equipment and Process Requirements

For appliance and process water use, install appliances, equipment, and processes within the project scope that meet the requirements listed in the table. For most of these appliances LEED is looking for ENERGY STAR labels or an equivalent.

Appliance  Requirement 

Residential Clothes Washer  ENERGY STAR 

Commercial Clothes Washer  CEE Tier 3A 

Residential Dishwasher  ENERGY STAR 

Pre‐rise Spray Valve  ≤ 1.3 gpm (4.9 lpm) 

Ice Machine  ENERGY STAR 

When applicable meet the following standards for processes. For heat rejection and cooling, don’t use once-through cooling with potable water

for any equipment or appliances that reject heat. Cooling towers and evaporative condensers must be equipped with makeup water

meters, conductivity controllers and overflow alarms, and efficient drift eliminators.

For the process water reduction this really ties back into the integrative process credit and the initial water model. When you have all of the stakeholders together you can set your agenda and focus on the drivers of the project. What decisions can be made that meet the intent of the credit, and will result in a better building?

Energy Synergy

Water usage may not intuitively connect to energy consumption. However, treating, heating and transporting water all takes energy. Reducing the amount of water that is wasted and reducing the energy to heat it can improve your savings. Set water temperatures only as hot as necessary (120 degrees F). Water heaters are often set to 140 by manufactures which is much hotter than necessary and causes energy waste. Water heater timers can be installed to be off during low times of occupancy.

Implementation

Ultra-low-flow showerheads In the United States, a standard shower in a typical building can use up to 2.5 gallons of water per minute, while ultra-low-flow showerheads use 1.5 gallons of water per minute, or less. Some models currently available on the market use as little as 0.5 gallons of water per minute.

Page 80: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

80

These little savings add up, generating significant reductions in the overall buildings’ water consumption. The US Environmental Protection Agency has calculated what savings from ultra-low-flow showerheads can generate for a 20,000 square foot model office building. The results show that at an extra cost of $4.99 per unit (or $0.50 per 1000 square feet) these devices can produce savings of $0.33 per 1000 square feet. The simple payback time for the investment is only 1.5 years. For hotels, the payback time can be even shorter. Ultra-low-flow faucets aerators Current standards say that kitchen faucets cannot exceed 2.5 gallons per minute, and bathroom faucets: 2.2 gallons per minute. The US EPA has calculated that using 1.0 gallons per minute faucet models for both kitchens and restrooms, for a 20,000 square feet model building can generate savings of $8.14 per 1000 square feet. At the incremental first cost of $5.87 per faucet, the simple payback for the investment is 0.3 years only. Dual flush toilets and flushometers Current regulations require that toilets must not exceed 1.6 gallons of water per flush. Dual flash toilets are designed to provide liquid flushing at 0.8 gallons per flush and solid flushing at 1.6 gallons per flush. For its model 20,000 square feet building, the EPA calculated that the incremental first cost for installing dual-flush toilets versus standards models was $50.00 per toilet. The calculated annual cost saving per 1000 square feet was $3.58 and the simple payback for the investment was 2.8 years. Industry experts claim that switching to dual flush toilets typically reduces water consumption in the building by 10%. Waterless urinals Waterless urinals are designed to treat waste chemically instead of using water. The device contains a chemical cartridge in its drains that traps odors while allowing the urine to pass through. Waterless urinals have been installed in several federal sites, such as: military bases, post offices, and national parks, recording very good performance. For example – the North Island Naval Air Station, in San Diego, California have over 200 waterless urinals installed on site. The study carried out by the University of California, Los Angeles, compared waterless urinals with traditional 3 gallons per flush ones. No odors or clogs were detected during the testing period and the chemical cartridge was sufficient for over 7,000 uses with no maintenance problems recorded.

Page 81: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

81

Waterless urinals did not displayed greater bacterial growth in comparison with traditional models and no significant difference between the ammonia levels in the vicinity of the two urinals was recorded. The economic analysis demonstrated a simple payback for waterless urinals of less than three years and annual return in the range of 37 to 61% (depending on the building type).

Strategy

Installing waterless urinals generate immediate cash savings, and contribute to the majority of your performance efficiency. In the EPA model building study, waterless solutions generated savings of $4.53 per 1000 square feet per year. Moreover, there was no incremental first cost included, as waterless units were $282 cheaper than traditional ones. Typically, waterless urinals generate a 14% reduction in building water use, according to the industry experts. The United States Department of Energy estimates that in the office and administrative buildings, plumbing fixtures in the restrooms are responsible for 60% of the overall water consumption. When combining waterless urinals with ultra-low-flow toilets and ultra-low-flow faucets, the building can easily achieve over a 40% reduction in the overall water consumption and qualify for points under Water Efficiency Credit Indoor Water Use Reduction.

WE Credit 2 | Indoor Water Use Reduction

Designing efficiency beyond the prerequisite, WE Credit Indoor Water use Reduction can earn up to 6 points. The points available for reducing water use depend on the percent reduction, and the rating system used. As an example, the highest percent reduction for the credit (50%) can earn 6 points for a New Construction project and 12 points for a Commercial Interiors project.

Alternative Water Sources

This credit is similar to Outdoor Water Use Reduction in that the additional savings can be achieved through other methods. In this case it is using alternative water resources. Remember that the first 20% has to come from using efficient fixtures. Any savings beyond 20% can come from efficient fixtures, or alternative water sources. The prerequisite and the credit have the exact same calculations, standards, and implementation.

Page 82: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

82

Rating System Adaptation

For Core & Shell projects, the project earns the prerequisite if no eligible fixtures and appliances are installed as part of the scope of work. For credit achievement, calculate what plumbing fixtures would be necessary to meet occupant needs. If the project team creates a lease agreement that includes requirements of tenants purchasing certain fixture with maximum flush and flow rates, this can be used to earn points for the credit. For school projects the annual use is assumed to be 195 days of the year due to summer break, school vacations, and holidays. Retail, healthcare, and school projects can earn additional points for meeting the requirement of one or two of the appliance and process water tables requirements. Hospitality projects can earn a point for meeting the requirements of one of the appliance and process water tables requirements.

Case Study

The Proximity Hotel, Greensboro, North Carolina, earned LEED Platinum under LEED for New Construction. The hotel was built with high efficiency plumbing fittings, able to save the hotel two million gallons of water annually (compared with standard fixtures). This achievement is imperative in the Greensboro area, where water resources are limited. About one third of a gallon of water is saved per each flush, compared to regular toilets. The strategy does not compromise guests’ comfort and satisfaction level − the hotel has not recorded any complaints and guests do not seem to notice any difference. As a result of high efficiency plumbing features installed on site, the hotel enjoys a $14,000 lower annual water bill. Water-saving plumbing fittings cost the hotel $7,000. The simple payback for this investment was six months only.

WE Prerequisite 3 | Building-level Water Metering

Traditionally, we put a lot of focus energy consumption, but we often overlook the amount of domestic water that people are using in their buildings. This metering prerequisite helps project teams verify predicted reductions and enables facility managers to better manage their building’s water consumption. New to v4, whole building level is be required to measure, track, and report total water use.

Page 83: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

83

Equipment Requirement

Install at least one permanent water meter that measures the total potable water use for the entire building and associated grounds. This is known as a whole-building water meter. It can be owned and installed by the utility company, or the building owner. The goal is to isolate the LEED project from other properties. Of course submetering is recommended, and we will talk more about that later. Some projects may require multiple meters if there have more than one source of potable water, such as an on-site well or on-site water treatment system in addition to the public water supply.

Reporting Requirement

It’s not enough to just know how much water a building uses. The real benefit is tracking the data over time and analyzing trends. Therefore, meter data must be compiled into monthly and annual summaries. Energy Star’s Portfolio Manager is a great tool to collect this information in one place, and synergizes with your energy use tracking and reporting. The meter readings can be manual or automated but in either case the data must be shared with USGBC. All projects must commit to sharing with USGBC the resulting whole-project water usage data for a five-year period beginning on the date the project accepts LEED certification or typical occupancy, whichever comes first.

Implementation

For this credit you are going to have to identify all the sources of potable water end uses in the building and the grounds – plumbing, irrigation, cooling towers, etc. The sources might include a public water supply, or some type of well installed onsite. Based on the types of water, that is going to determine what you need to meter. If you have both public water and a well, they both have to be metered if they are separately connected to the project. If both of those sources are routed together before they arrive at your building intake, then you only need the single meter. The type of meter you choose doesn’t matter as long as it is permanent. It can be manual or a wireless based system that feeds into your building operations system. Once the building is occupied or certified you have to start tracking the water use and sharing it with USGBC. An extra meter or two isn’t going to add a whole lot of cost to the building project, and the data metering yields will be invaluable. The saying you hear repeatedly by LEED practitioners is you can’t manage what you don’t measure. If you’re landscape design called for using 20,000 gallons of water for irrigation per year but it ends up using 100,000, you wouldn’t find that out very quickly unless you metered the grounds, as the prerequisite requires. The types and locations of the meters are decisions the facility

Page 84: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

84

manager and MEP designers can figure out quickly early on in the process. Consider this another item to add to the integrative design.

WE Credit 4 | Water Metering

Projects must include permanent water meters for two or more of the following water subsystems, as applicable to the project: Irrigation, Indoor plumbing fixtures and fittings, Domestic hot water, Boilers, Reclaimed Water, and Other Process uses.

Irrigation

Meter water systems serving at least 80% of the irrigated landscaped area. Calculate the percentage of irrigated landscape area served as the total metered irrigated landscape area divided by the total irrigated landscape area. Landscape areas fully covered with xeriscaping or native vegetation that requires no routine irrigation may be excluded from the calculation.

Indoor plumbing fixtures and fittings

Meter water systems serving at least 80% of the indoor fixtures and fitting described in WE Prerequisite Indoor Water Use Reduction, either directly or by deducting all other measured water use from the measured total water consumption of the building and grounds.

Domestic Hot Water

Meter water use of at least 80% of the installed domestic hot water heating capacity (including both tanks and on-demand heaters).

Boilers

Boilers with aggregate projected annual water use of 100,000 gallons (378 500 liters) or more, or a boiler of more than 500,000 BtuH (150 kW). A single makeup meter may record flows for multiple boilers.

Reclaimed Water

Meter reclaimed water, regardless of rate. A reclaimed water system with a makeup water connection must also be metered so that the true reclaimed water component can be determined.

Page 85: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

85

Other process water

Meter at least 80% of expected daily water consumption for process end uses, such as humidification systems, dishwashers, clothes washers, pools, and other subsystems using process water.

Philosophy

Why Submeter? Installing a Submeter doesn’t reduce the amount of water used, or does it?

Metering can be employed at several different scales, and is used to support effective management of a building’s systems, including management of comfort, energy and water consumption, delineated cost burdens, and investment decisions in the short and long term. Historically, utility metering has occurred on an aggregate basis, with measurements taken for whole buildings or campuses roughly once per month. While this model has supported utility cost-recovery and billing practices, in recent years the utility sector has looked to greater integration of information technologies as potential sources of resource conservation and economic savings. Thus far, among consumer-focused smart grid technologies, smart meters have received the bulk of public attention and funding, with less emphasis placed on submeters or the metering of resources not related to energy. Whereas advanced meters generate more temporally resolved longitudinal data, submeters provide more spatially resolved measurements for individual areas, systems, or equipment. Moreover, while utility companies have led smart meter deployments, submetering requires involvement of and investment by individual building owners as well as more detailed tailoring to specific building configurations. Advanced metering may provide data at hour- or minute-long intervals at a full building scale, but submetering is capable of providing data at near-continuous time resolution and at a sub-building scale. Resource conservation is achieved through improved operation and maintenance practices and/or occupant behaviors such as reducing unnecessary lighting or heating loads and reprogramming energy control systems. Metrics for both efficiency and conservation require knowledge of current resource use and practices, generally at the sub-building level, but the temporal scales for the data may be different. Retrofits for resource efficiency can sometimes be identified through snapshot data such as those obtained through an energy or water audit.

Page 86: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

86

While helpful, audits are of limited use in that they provide data only for one specific period of time. Submetering, on the other hand, can drive long-term and deeper efficiency and conservation improvements by introducing a localized, continuous timescale. This refined timescale provides insight into daily, weekly, or seasonal operations issues, occupant behaviors, performance of installed equipment (e.g., HVAC and lighting), and verification of installed efficiency technologies. A time-series approach to analysis also provides the necessary insight to drive conservation through changes in occupant behaviors or continual improvements to building operating procedures as conditions change over time. Moreover, these refined data points may reveal other system problems or potential efficiency measures that were not immediately apparent with snapshot data. This gets back to the old saying - ‘you can’t manage what you don’t measure’. If you don’t know how much water a subsystem is using, there is no way you can reduce that water use and quantify the reduction.

Rating System Adaptation

There is a healthcare adaptation for this credit. Healthcare projects meter an additional five of the following systems: purified water systems (reverse-osmosis, de-ionized);

filter backwash water;

water use in dietary department;

water use in laundry;

water use in laboratory;

water use in central sterile and processing department;

water use in physiotherapy and hydrotherapy and treatment areas;

water use in surgical suite;

closed-looped hydronic system makeup water; and

cold-water makeup for domestic hot water systems.

WE Credit 3 | Cooling Tower Water Use

Originally pilot credit, cooling tower water has been brought into the water consumption equation in LEED v4. In addition to meeting the ASHRAE 189 cooling tower requirements, points will be awarded for projects which perform a chemical analysis of

Page 87: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

87

the blowdown water and maximize water cycles to the cooling tower based upon this analysis. Cooling towers regulate temperature by dissipating heat from recirculating water used to cool chillers, air-conditioning equipment, or other process equipment. Heat is rejected from the tower primarily through evaporation. Therefore, by design, cooling towers consume significant amounts of water. Beyond evaporation, cooling tower eliminate water daily in a process known as blowdown. When the water within the system cycles through the pipes, it accumulates contaminants and micro particles. This build-up is not ideal for system performance and a portion must be bleed out of the system and new, clean water added to make-up the difference. Saving water that gets lost through blowdown is the major emphasis in this credit in recognition that thousands of gallons of water can be saved cycling back non-contaminated water. Because of the sheer magnitude of water used to operate a cooling tower, implementing a successful water management program and automatic controls can have a much greater overall impact on your building’s water efficiency than retrofitting indoor plumbing fixtures. Depending on your local water rates, it can also bring your project significant cost savings. Projects have to conduct a one-time potable water analysis, in order to optimize cooling tower cycles.

Requirements

The analysis has to measure at least five of the control parameters listed here, verifying they do not exceed the maximum concentrations:

Parameter  Maximum Level 

Calcium (CaCO3)  1,000 ppm 

Total alkalinity  1,000 ppm 

Silicon dioxide  100 ppm 

Chlorine  250 ppm 

Conductivity  2,000 S/cm 

Project teams calculate the number of cooling tower cycles by dividing the maximum allowed concentration level of each parameter by the actual concentration level of each parameter found in the potable makeup water. Limit cooling tower cycles to avoid exceeding maximum values for any of these parameters.

Page 88: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

88

For a project to earn one point, the setup can’t exceed 10 cycles, without exceeding any filtration levels or affecting operation of condenser water systems. For two points, increase the level of treatment or use a minimum of 20% recycled nonpotable water.

Terminology

The thermal efficiency and longevity of the cooling tower and equipment used to cool depend on the proper management of water recirculated through the tower. Water leaves a cooling tower system in any one of four ways: Evaporation: This is the primary function of the tower and is the method that transfers heat from the cooling tower system to the environment. The quantity of evaporation is not a subject for water efficiency efforts (although improving the energy efficiency of the systems you are cooling will reduce the evaporative load on your tower). Drift: A small quantity of water may be carried from the tower as mist or small droplets. Drift loss is small compared to evaporation and blowdown, and is controlled with baffles and drift eliminators. Blowdown or bleed-off: When water evaporates from the tower, dissolved solids (such as calcium, magnesium, chloride, and silica) are left behind. As more water evaporates, the concentration of dissolved solids increases. If the concentration gets too high, the solids can cause scale to form within the system or the dissolved solids can lead to corrosion problems. The concentration of dissolved solids is controlled by blowdown. Carefully monitoring and controlling the quantity of blowdown provides the most significant opportunity to conserve water in cooling tower operations. Basin leaks or overflows: Properly operated towers should not have leaks or overflows. Check float control equipment to ensure the basin level is being maintained properly and check system valves to make sure there are no unaccounted for losses. The sum of water that is lost from the tower must be replaced by make-up water: Make-up equals Evaporation plus Blowdown plus Drift

Efficiency

A key parameter used to evaluate cooling tower operation is "cycles of concentration" (sometimes referred to as cycles of concentration ratio). This is calculated as the ratio of the concentration of dissolved solids (or conductivity) in the blowdown water compared to the make-up water. Since dissolved solids enter the system in the make-up water and

Page 89: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

89

exit the system in the blowdown water, the cycles of concentration are also approximately equal to the ratio of volume of make-up to blowdown water. From a water efficiency standpoint, you want to maximize cycles of concentration, which will minimize blowdown water quantity and reduce make-up water demand. However, this can only be done within the constraints of your make-up water and cooling tower water chemistry. Dissolved solids increase as cycles of concentration increase, which can cause scale and corrosion problems unless carefully controlled.

Alternative Water Sources

In addition to carefully controlling blowdown, other water efficiency opportunities arise from using alternate sources of make-up water. Water from other equipment within a facility can sometimes be recycled and reused for cooling tower make-up with little or no pre-treatment, including the following: Air handler condensate (water that collects when warm, moist air passes over the

cooling coils in air handler units). This reuse is particularly appropriate because the condensate has a low mineral content, and typically is generated in greatest quantities when cooling tower loads are the highest.

Water used in a once through cooling system.

Pretreated effluent from other processes, provided that any chemicals used are compatible with the cooling tower system.

High-quality municipal wastewater effluent or recycled water (where available).

Rainwater is most preferred because it has the least amount of dissolved solids

Ice machine condensate

Food steamer discharge water

Calculations

Calculate and understand your "cycles of concentration." Check the ratio of conductivity of blowdown and make-up water. Work with your cooling tower water treatment specialist to maximize the cycles of concentration. Many systems operate at two to four cycles of concentration, while six cycles or more may be possible. Increasing cycles from three to six reduces cooling tower make-up water by 20% and cooling tower blowdown by 50%.

Design

Get expert advice to help determine an efficient cooling tower design. New cooling tower designs and improved materials can significantly reduce water and energy requirements for cooling.

Page 90: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

90

For specifics on this technology, consult with experts in the field. Your first resource should be local or headquarters for engineers, but do not overlook input from experienced contractors or Government agencies. Consider in your design how alternate sources of make-up water can be used for the cooling tower system.

Case Study

Established in 1960, the NASA Marshall Space Flight Center (MSFC) is located in Huntsville, Alabama. In 2005, MSFC built Building 4600, NASA’s first certified building under the LEED rating system, achieving a Silver rating. Since that time, a companion building has been constructed at MSFC that achieved a Gold LEED rating. MSFC is also one of the first NASA sites to pursue LEED O&M certification. This case study highlights MSFC’s implementation of new water treatment technologies to improve the efficiency and performance of one of their cooling systems. MSFC identified a problematic cooling loop with six separate compressor heat exchangers and a history of poor efficiency. The facility engineering team at MSFC partnered with Flozone Services, Incorporated to implement a comprehensive water treatment platform to improve the overall efficiency of the system. First, the team at MSFC identified a service provider and technology platform to better manage the cooling program on the inefficient cooling loop. The water treatment platform included 24/7 monitoring and management of cooling system performance, and real-time adjustments if needed. Traditional chemical treatments were replaced by a patented technology that utilizes radio frequencies to alter the water’s scaling tendencies by creating a “seeding” mechanism that agglomerates scale-forming minerals in the water. This technology removes minerals before they can be deposited on heat exchange surfaces. Additionally, ozone was implemented to minimize biological activity resulting from ozone’s strong oxidizing characteristics. Tight control of pH levels coupled with tight control of ozone production provided corrosion control, and side-stream filtration was integrated to remove sediment and debris from the recirculating system water. To demonstrate the technology’s capabilities, three heat exchangers were sent off site to be treated by the proposed system. The technology demonstration showed marked improvement after only 48 hours. Because of the success of this demonstration, MSFC opted to have all three heat exchangers cleaned for a 90-day time period. Performance Baseline and Improvement Projections Prior to implementation, electricity, water, and sewer consumption data were collected to establish a baseline. Additionally, numerous water tests were performed on the cooling system and raw water to fully understand system performance along with existing water

Page 91: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

91

quality considerations. This particular cooling loop was running at 2.5 cycles of concentration, and used 4,142,400 gallons of water and 9,896,000 kilowatt-hours (kWh) of electricity in 2008. After assessing system performance, Flozone Services projected savings of 420,808 gallons of water over eight months by increasing cycles of concentration to 5.0. Technology Implementation The treatment platform was integrated at the beginning of August 2009, while the cooling loop was in operation. Prior to installing the treatment platform, the three heat exchangers cleaned during the technology demonstration period were re-installed in the system. The remaining three heat exchangers were inspected but not cleaned prior to implementation of the new treatment system. These three heat exchangers had extensive deposits and bio-fouling present. Inclusive of the treatment platform, software was implemented to allow control and monitoring from multiple locations, including the central operations computer and a backup computer in a different control room. Incremental changes were made to the system set points and alarms to allow the treatment platform to slowly increase cycles of concentration and gradually remove historical deposits and bio-fouling. This approach ensured system strainers weren’t clogged with debris. Performance Improvements Water usage and energy usage were tracked for an eight month period in 2009 and compared to the same timeframe in 2008. Water and energy trends show cumulative savings as MSFC achieved reduced water consumption of 821,300 gallons and reduced electrical consumption of 434,900 kWh during the eight-month technology assessment. By implementing a comprehensive water treatment platform, MSFC successfully eliminated treatment chemicals in the selected cooling loop, removed historical deposits and biofouling from heat exchanger surfaces, and lowered operating temperatures on the heat exchangers between 5°F and 6°F. The resulting eight-month documented savings exceeded expected savings in every category.

Page 92: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

92

Key Terms

Watersense Xeriscaping Native And Adaptive Plant Species Vegetative Softscapes Potable Water Greywater Energy Policy Act Of 1992 (Epact) Private Lavatory Process Water Flushometers GPM GPF Submetering On-Site Water Treatment Domestic Hot Water Boilers Reclaimed Water Cooling Tower Blowdown Bleed-Off Cooling Tower Cycles Cycles Of Concentration Drift Dissolved Solids Conductivity Make-Up Water

Page 93: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

93

Chapter 6 – Energy and Atmosphere

Overview

This section is one of the most challenging sections because it is very technical. The Energy and Atmosphere category can earn more points than any other category; 33 points of 110 possible points, or 30% of the entire application. Once you master the concepts of designing and building LEED energy systems with balanced atmospheric impacts, you will better understand the relationship between mechanical ventilation and GHG impacts. The knowing of how a building serves your productivity and comfort needs, grows your strength of confidence in joining the movement to evolve success for all beings; humans, their systems, and the planet (and her systems). Therefore, Energy and Atmosphere addresses a number of areas: Energy Performance, How well your building’s energy performs in design versus

the baseline case. Predicted. Tracking Energy Performance, including feedback devices; commissioning the

building, and metering. Demand Response, Peak grid events. This is cutting edge, despite LEED’s 12+

years of market presence. Refrigerant Management, CFC-based refrigerants in buildings. Renewable Energy, On-site or community scale based renewables. Green Power and Carbon Offsets, Mitigate greenhouse gas emissions (GHG)

through the use of grid-source, renewable energy technologies and carbon sequestration projects.

Scorecard

The Energy & Atmosphere credit category has 4 prerequisites and 7 credits. Four of the credits build upon the prerequisites. EA Prerequisite 1: Fundamental Commissioning and Verification

EA Credit 1: Enhanced Commissioning

EA Prerequisite 2: Minimum Energy Performance

EA Credit 2: Optimize Energy Performance

Page 94: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

94

EA Prerequisite 3: Building level energy metering

EA Credit 3: Advance Energy Metering

EA Prerequisite 4: Fundamental Refrigerant Management

EA Credit 6: Enhanced Refrigerant Management

EA Credit 4: Demand Response

EA Credit 5: Renewable Energy Production

EA Credit 7: Green power and carbon offsets

EA Prerequisite 1 | Fundamental Commissioning and Verification

The intent is to support the design, construction, and eventual operation of a project to meet the owner’s project requirements for energy, water, indoor environmental quality, and durability. Following the trend that lots of green building techniques are now becoming minimum building code; Commissioning (Cx) is mandated in some parts of the country. In the past, project teams would say ‘We don’t want to do LEED because we don’t want to pay for an expensive energy model or commissioning.” Whereas now, qualified and credentialed Commissioning Agents (CxA) are thriving around the quality assurance concept of a third party review of HVAC systems, domestic hot water, daylighting, and lighting controls. In 2015, there are buildings and institutions that may not pursue LEED, but they pay professionals for Energy Modeling and Cx services because they see the value in it.

Concept Process

First, the owner documents their expectations, or project requirements. The owner’s project requirements (OPR) is a written document detailing the functional requirements of a project and the expectations of the building’s use and operation as they relate to the systems to be commissioned. Typical System List HVAC systems | Mechanical AND passive

Electric Systems | Lighting and daylighting controls

Plumbing Systems | Domestic hot water systems

Onsite renewable energy systems | Wind, solar, gas-if applicable

Page 95: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

95

Building Envelope | Acknowledge in document, but implementation not required

Optional | Life safety systems, communications and data systems, fire protection systems, and process equipment.

The Engineers ensure that the OPR is met in their drawings and specifications as they develop the basis of design (BOD). The basis of design describes the systems to be commissioned and outlines any design assumptions that are not otherwise included in the design documents, such as assemblies, and systems. The CxA joins here to begin drawing reviews. The field-commissioning happens after the contractors build the building. The CxA functionally inspects all the systems in the BOD against the OPR. A report is made.

Referenced Standards

The standards used for the prerequisite is ASHRAE Guideline 0-2005 and ASHRAE Guideline 1.1–2007 for HVAC&R Systems, as they relate to energy, water, indoor environmental quality, and durability. This is the guide that will be followed when commissioning the required systems. NIBS Guideline 3-2012 for Exterior Enclosures provides additional guidance on the requirements for exterior closures.

Requirements

The commissioning authority (CxA) must do the following: Review the OPR, BOD, and project design.

Develop and implement a commissioning plan.

Confirm incorporation of commissioning requirements into the construction documents.

Develop construction checklists.

Develop a system test procedure.

Verify system test execution.

Maintain an issues and benefits log throughout the commissioning process.

Prepare a final commissioning process report.

Document all findings and recommendations and report directly to the owner throughout the process.

The review of the exterior enclosure design may be performed by a qualified member of the design or construction team (or an employee of that firm) who is not directly responsible for design of the building envelope.

Page 96: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

96

Commissioning Authority

For fundamental commissioning, the commissioning authority must have experience in at least 2 building projects. The individual must be independent of the project’s design and construction team. The individual reports results and findings directly to the owner. If the project is less than 20,000 square feet (1,860 square meters) the commissioning authority may be on the design or construction team. In essence LEED is setting these rules to avoid conflicts of interest. There are exceptions to these rules as you get into smaller projects, so be familiar with those rules if you plan to document the prerequisite. The matrix in your Reference Guide describes the conditions and qualifications for who can be a commissioning authority and their responsibilities. The commissioning authority provides third party verification, and if they are the ones doing the design your project will not get objectivity. In the same sense, if they are the person installing the products, they may not be doing the balancing or testing required that a Commissioning Agent would look for. There is some separation needed. In general, LEED wants them to be contracted directly with the owner.

Ongoing Operations and Maintenance Plan

The CxA, with the help of the project team, must prepare and maintain a current facilities requirements and operations and management plan. This document facilitates transition from construction to occupancy. It is a technical manual describing how the facilities manager can operate the building efficiently. The plan needs to include: a sequence of operations for the building;

the building occupancy schedule;

equipment run-time schedules;

setpoints for all HVAC equipment;

set lighting levels throughout the building;

minimum outside air requirements;

any changes in schedules or setpoints for different seasons, days of the week, and times of day;

a systems narrative describing the mechanical and electrical systems and equipment;

a preventive maintenance plan for building equipment described in the systems narrative; and

a commissioning program that includes periodic commissioning requirements, ongoing commissioning tasks, and continuous tasks for critical facilities.

Page 97: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

97

The O&M staff training plan should be developed by the contractor and reviewed by the commissioning authority to ensure that all systems to be commissioned are covered.

OPR Development and System Design

The Commissioning Agent and the Project Team coordinate a scope based on the owner project requirements. Remember those owner project requirements can start in simple narrative style. For instance, “This room will be a warehouse, workers stand and operate forklifts. I need it to be at least 68 degrees.” The owner would indicate certain light levels needed in the rooms and any other experiential descriptions. These are very basic criteria and then they get pushed into fuller descriptions in the basis of design. The Owner’s Project Requirements should be developed either by the Owner or by the Commissioning authority with direct input from the Owner. If your project is going to attempt the Integrative Process credit the OPR would be developed alongside of this in one of the design workshops at the start of the project. This document should describe the requirements of the project ranging from the building usage and area requirements, to the expected HVAC setpoints. The more information that is identified in this document, the better understanding the design team will have when developing the building size, layout, and systems for the project. Some of the elements that should be included in the OPR are as follows: Applicable codes required, detailed anticipated occupancy schedule, number of expected occupants, temperature and humidity requirements, specific thermal zoning requirements, HVAC, lighting, plumbing fixture, and water heating system types preferred (if known), controls system requirements for lighting and HVAC, energy savings goals, LEED certification level desired, project schedule, budget considerations, and operations and maintenance requirements.

BOD Development

During the schematic design or design development phase of the project (depending on size/scope), the OPR should be consulted by the design team. This should lead to the design team creating the Basis of Design document. This document will indicate how the project building will meet the OPR. The document includes assumptions about the design decisions, and may include: Overview of system assemblies

Expectations of systems and performance criteria

Descriptions of systems and how they will operate

Codes and standards the design was based off of

Page 98: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

98

Owner’s directives about how the facility will be used

“Concepts, calculations, decisions, and product selections; the specific design methods, techniques, and software used in design; information regarding ambient conditions (climatic, geologic, structural, existing construction) used during design; and specific manufacturer makes and models used as the basis of design for drawings and specifications.”

Revision history of the document

After the team has confirmed that the OPR can be met by the BOD, the design team begins the design process and moves towards the construction documents. Prior to the 50% construction document phase, the Commissioning authority should perform a thorough review of the progress drawings against the OPR and BOD documents. This will ensure that the design is on track to meet all OPR’s and provide a step in the process to ask questions about accessibility, functionality, energy efficiency, and other long-term Owner related issues. Direction for the commissioning team is provided by assembling the documentation of the OPR at the inception of a project and the proper transfer of this information from one party to the next throughout the building delivery process. The Commissioning Process has been structured to coincide with the phases of a generic project with Pre- Design, Design, Construction, Occupancy and Operations phases. Beginning the commissioning process at project inception will maximize benefits and minimize the cost. The entire goal of commissioning is to provide a building that is not only designed and built with the OPR in mind, but one that is maintainable and has the lowest possible operating costs following completion and turnover.

Commissioning Process

Document and commission all systems outlined in the prerequisite. Documenting system design is the responsibility of the design engineer. The CxA reviews the drawings and appropriate submittals against the ORP and BOD. Functional commissioning includes verifying proper installation of products, testing, and training on the products. Everybody - owners, users, architects - should be involved in this process. The commissioning plan is a document that describes the systems to be commissioned, the commissioning team and their roles and responsibilities, the schedule of events, equipment startup and functional performance test procedures, and O&M staff training requirements.

Page 99: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

99

Incorporating the commissioning requirements into the CDs (construction documents equals plans and specs) includes adding commissioning specifications to the project. This details contractor expectations to include in the project pricing, covering all the aspects of the commissioning plan. In addition to the commissioning specifications, the construction documents should also include in detail the components in the system necessary to allow Test and Balance and Commissioning of the system. This includes sensors, test ports, and control points that will make testing possible. System verification checklists (startup forms) and functional performance testing procedures are created by the commissioning authority (or design team) for use in the construction process. This can be developed either before or after CDs, but early in the construction process. When created by the commissioning authority, these forms should be reviewed by the design team and contractor prior to incorporation into the construction process to ensure it matches both the design intent and best practices.

Step-by-Step Implementation

1. Designate commissioning authority 2. Establish Owner Project Requirements (OPR) and Basis of Design (BOD) 3. The commissioning authority reviews OPR and BOD 4. Develop and implement the Commissioning Plan 5. Incorporate Commissioning Requirements into the Construction Documents 6. Develop construction checklists 7. Develop a system test procedure 8. Verify system test execution 9. Maintain a log that documents issues and benefits 10. Complete a summary commissioning report

Timeline

The commissioning authority must be engaged by the end of the design development phase. That’s a requirement for the prerequisite. It needs to be someone that week-to-week is part of the team to get the best possible product. Create transparency by incorporating commissioning into construction documents. This is formal set of plans used as the basis for construction. At the end of construction, execute the commissioning plan by verifying installation and performance of system. The design and construction team should remain engaged and perform any corrective actions as required in the initial findings. Then, publish a summary commissioning report. This is a logical progression of what the owner wants. Design to their vision, then incorporate the vision into the documents, and execute a commissioning plan to ensure the vision is a reality. It is very advantageous to start the commissioning process as soon as possible in the project schedule. By having a Commissioning Authority involved in

Page 100: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

100

the project early, that person can help ask questions of the Owner’s expectations and help steer the design process to match those expectations.

EA Credit 1 | Enhanced Commissioning

Who the commissioning authority can be is different between the credit and prerequisite. For the credit, the CxA may not be an employee of the design or construction firm nor a subcontractor to the construction firm. It’s important to note the differences.

Requirements

In addition to the Fundamental Commissioning, you would implement extra steps for increased oversight and document review. Review Submittals

Train Operations Team

10 month post-occupancy visit

The commissioning authority must be leading, reviewing, and overseeing the commissioning process. This credit has 2 options based on scope of systems. Option 1 enhanced systems commissioning can earn 3 to 4 points. And/or Option 2 envelope commissioning can earn 2 points.

Option 1 – Path 1

Option 1 enhanced systems commissioning has 2 paths for achievement. Path 1 enhanced commissioning can earn 3 points. The commissioning authority must review and check submittals in accordance with the OPR and BOD. The review must be concurrent with the review of the architect or engineer of record. Verify the systems manual. This is something is nice for optimal performance of the building. While it's recommended in Fundamental Commissioning that you train people, it's mandatory and you have to verify that personnel were trained as part of Enhanced commissioning.

Page 101: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

101

Occupancy Phase

The big part of Enhanced Commissioning is a 10 month follow-up after substantial completion. The idea behind this being is that it occurs within the warranty period for all of the mechanical, electrical and plumbing fixtures. In this process the commissioning authority goes through and determines how the system is working. This is a smart idea as far as tuning the building. How many times have you seen buildings where you say, “Well, the designer put in these daylight sensor lights, but they're just not working.” During this 10 month period, occupants and facility managers have had enough time to kick around the systems and to see whether things are working correctly or not. Or you may see energy bills after these first 10 months and say, “I thought we would be saving a lot more.” The Commissioning authority can help find out where some of the gaps are. This is another check to see how the actual performance rates compared to the design performance.

Option 1 – Path 2

Or project teams can choose Path 2 Enhanced and monitoring-based commissioning. Monitoring based commissioning - or MBCx - is the integration of three components: permanent energy monitoring systems, real-time energy analysis, and ongoing commissioning. This path requires first achieving path 1. Projects can get additional points by installing the right monitoring devices and tracking points. The points must be measured and evaluated on an ongoing basis based on those tracking points that you’ve installed. This is a good option for projects that are energy intensive and need real time data to make adjustments, such as a data center. Monitoring based commissioning allows users to track energy consumption, detect faulty equipment, and see unusual energy patterns in real-time.

Continuous Monitoring

For monitoring based commissioning all of the procedures and measurement points need to be included in the commissioning plan. The following need to be addressed: roles and responsibilities;

measurement requirements (meters, points, metering systems, data access);

the points to be tracked, with frequency and duration for trend monitoring;

the limits of acceptable values for tracked points and metered values

Page 102: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

102

the elements used to evaluate performance, including conflict between systems, out-of-sequence operation of systems components, and energy and water usage profiles;

an action plan for identifying and correcting operational errors and deficiencies;

training to prevent errors;

planning for repairs needed to maintain performance

The monitoring systems are looking at real-time energy analytics and ongoing commissioning. Path 1 is a one stop process while Path 2 is ongoing. Knowing the real-time data and knowing how the building is currently performing, that can be helpful to clients. Utilizing metering equipment for monitoring is the ongoing process of verification. It opens up the opportunity for continuous improvement.

Option 2 – Envelop Cx

Option 2 Envelope commissioning can earn 2 points. Fulfill the requirements in EA Prerequisite Fundamental Commissioning and Verification as they apply to the building’s thermal envelope in addition to mechanical and electrical systems and assemblies. Enhanced commissioning is generally pretty familiar to everyone. You can build on it from the prerequisite. Envelope commissioning is new. Many project teams may have expertise in option 1 but not in option 2. It’s a case where a project team may take a look hiring different companies for the different options. The work can be completed independantly. The Building Enclosure Commissioning (BECx) process is utilized to validate that the design and performance of materials, components, assemblies and systems achieve the objectives and requirements of the owner. The BECx process achieves this through experience, expertise, modeling, observation, testing, documenting and verifying materials, components, assemblies and systems to validate that both their use and installation meet the owner’s requirements. The process uses performance oriented practices and procedures to verify that the project is achieving the Owner’s Project Requirements (OPR) throughout the delivery of the project.

Requirements

Just like in Option 1, if you choose envelope commissioning the commissioning authority is going to complete the same things: Review contractor submittals.

Verify inclusion of systems manual requirements in construction documents.

Page 103: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

103

Verify inclusion of operator and occupant training requirements in construction documents.

Verify systems manual updates and delivery.

Verify operator and occupant training delivery and effectiveness.

Verify seasonal testing.

Review building operations 10 months after substantial completion.

Develop an on-going commissioning plan

Envelope commissioning will be included in the OPR and BOD, as well as the commissioning plan. The envelope is treated like another system and follows similar documentation and testing. Note that not every commissioning authority is qualified to do envelope commissioning. You can have two different commissioning authorities on the project – one for the systems and another who specializes in envelopes. One person should serve as lead CxA to oversees all of the commissioning activities for coordination in overall project documents and timeline.

Timeline

The Commissioning Process should not infringe upon the authority or responsibility of the project’s designers or contractors. While the CxA can identify areas of concern, relative to the owner’s project requirements, to be discussed with the owner and their team, it is the owner who determines the course of action by the team. It is recommended that the CxA be engaged in predesign to define the scope of the commissioning so that the owner’s agreements with the project team clearly define the commissioning tasks that will be performed during the design phases of the project. The commissioning tasks and obligations between the Owner’s Design Professionals or Contractors contained in contract forms or project-specific contracts provide the agreement that establishes the foundation for the commissioning process. It is intended to aid these professionals involved in providing an Owner with a facility that meets their expectations and requirements. The BECx process begins during the Pre-Design Phase and continues for the life of the facility through the Occupancy and Operations Phase. The process includes specific tasks to be performed during each project phase in order to verify that the design, construction, operational maintenance and training meet the OPR. Remember the verifications and late 10 month review are the standouts, as well seasonal testing and verifying a systems manual and training. Those are sort of extraneous things throughout, but the verifications and late 10 month review after substantial completion are the most notable differences.

Page 104: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

104

Rating System Adaptations

For Core & Shell projects the systems to commission only include what’s in the design team’s scope of work. For data centers there are additional activities for the commissioning authority to perform depending on the size of the computer rooms. There are also more rigorous failure mode testing. Healthcare projects have additional testing of life safety equipment.

Case Study

One of Sustainable Investment Groups (SIG) commissioning agents discovered that a three-way valve for a condenser water system serving a chiller and cooling tower was stuck at 80% closed. The solution to this inappropriate situation was costing the building owner over $8,700 per year in additional pumping energy. After the valve ($800) was replaced, the payback was just over one month and this building’s Energy Star score went up because of one discovery.

The Case for Commissioning

The 2011 AABC Commissioning Group industry event highlighted a handful of projects with major issues that could have been avoided with commissioning. The buildings were tested and balanced during construction without finding (or correcting) any problems. a Caribbean Beach Resort Project with 2,112 rooms that had $5.5 million in

HVAC and Envelope Problems before Opening Day,

a Hotel in Charleston, SC Project had $10 million in HVAC and Envelope Problems immediately after opening,

a Florida Courthouse Project that had $15 million in repairs and the building was evacuated,

a Hotel Project in Kansas City that had $2 million in HVAC repairs during its first summer in operation.

These problems could have been predicted during the design stage. The changes needed to prevent these failures would not have cost more money or added to the schedule. Commissioning would have prevented these problems.

Page 105: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

105

EA Prerequisite 2 | Minimum Energy Performance

The intent of this prerequisite is to reduce the environmental and economic harms of excessive energy use by achieving a minimum level of energy efficiency for the building and its systems. There are 3 options for this prerequisite. Option 1 Whole building energy simulation Option 2 Prescriptive compliance - ASHRAE 50% advanced energy design guide Option 3 Prescriptive compliance - Advanced Buildings Core Performance guide

Option 1 - Whole building energy simulation

The first option is a whole building energy simulation which most people do. Projects need to achieve a five percent improvement for new buildings, and 3 percent improvement for renovations, and 2% for core and shell projects based on energy costs. 5, 3, or 2% of what, you ask? A percentage improvement comes over a baseline building performance rating. The baseline building performance rating is calculated using the updated ASHRAE 90.1-2010 standard. As the LEED rating system is updated, it includes the newest standards available and incorporates them into the LEED requirements. For this requirement a computer simulation model is used for the entire building. Your project must comply with the mandatory provisions of ASHRAE 90.1-2010, and include all energy costs with the building project. The percent savings is calculated before factoring any savings from renewable energy systems. An important note is that these calculations are based on energy costs, not on the quantity of energy saved.

Like the water prerequisites the reduction for the prerequisite must be achieved without accounting for any cost offset by onsite renewables. Projects need to be efficient first in the building design, and then in the next step for the credit to look at supplementing energy use with renewables. In the past for earlier rating system versions projects could ignore efficiency, and just dump a solar array on the roof to show a reduction. For the prerequisite projects can’t do that anymore.

Prescriptive Options

Option 2 and 3 are based on different standards. They do not require computer modeling and project teams simply follow design guidelines. These prescriptive approaches are limited in the size of the building and the number of points available. What can happen with this prescriptive path for design, is that it encourages project teams into an integrative approach.

Page 106: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

106

Option 2 is a prescriptive approach, using the ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guide. There are different guides based on different types of buildings. Consider if you had an office. If the office is less than 100,000 square feet then use the ASHRAE Advanced Energy Guide for Small to Medium Office Buildings. There are other guides for medium to large big box retail, k-12 schools, and large hospitals. Projects must comply with the applicable criteria based on the building’s specific climate zone. Option 3 is a Prescriptive Compliance Path using the Advanced Buildings Core Performance Guide. This is for buildings less than 100,000 square feet (9,290 meters). Healthcare, warehouses and lab projects are ineligible for this option.

Referenced Standards

New in LEED v4 is the use of ASHRAE standard 90.1-2010. With LEED v4 there are up to 20 points for an energy model but only 6 points for the prescriptive path using ASHRAE 50% Guide. That is a 14 point difference if you don’t do an energy model. The difference is comparing the ASHRAE 90.1 baseline from 2003 to 2010. The ‘50%’ in the standard for the prescription path refers to 50% better than the 2003 standard. So basically, the 2010 baseline performance is more than 50% improved from 2003. Energy model practitioners will notice that a significant update is the regulation of plug loads. Previously, most buildings used a default value that process loads were 25%. Now, the regulation of plug loads – the computers and things that get plugged into walls – must reflect predicted usage based on program requirements. Daylight harvesting was not a baseline in LEED 2009, and now it is in LEED v4, so projects don’t easily win benefit for doing daylight harvesting, they must design optimized daylight harvesting.

Mandatory Requirements

The first step you will do is determining the building’s climate zone, because different zones have different requirements. There are a lot of new mandatory requirements introduced by following ASHRAE 90.1-2010. For example some just for lighting include: All spaces must now have automatic shut-off control

The lighting power density has to be reduced an average of 17% in different space types

Page 107: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

107

Every spaces has to have vacancy or occupancy sensors to 50% or less of the lighting power

Exterior lighting must be turned off or operated at a reduced level during daylight hours

When a stairway is vacant the lights have to be reduced by at least 50%

Automatic daylight control is a requirement, so for daylight zones the lights have to be under automatic control

All installed controls must be tested, like making sure the occupancy sensors and timers work

Another new requirement is half of outlets or receptacles in open office, private offices, or computer classrooms must be under automatic control, so they can be switched off automatically when not in use. The control has to be hardwired – it can’t be a device that’s plugged into a receptacle. For implementation, the mandatory requirements address the following: Building Envelope Requirements

HVAC&R Requirements

Service Water Heating Requirements

Power Requirements

Lighting Requirements

Specialty Equipment Requirements

Your project has to show you met all of those requirements and you beat the ASHRAE 90.1-2010 standard by at least 5% for BD+C projects. How are you going to get that 5%? It’s now harder just to meet the standard. Lighting controls must be optimized. For example what is required by code is occupant sensors have a 30 minute timeout. However, if you have occupancy sensors timeout out at 20 minutes, or even 10 or 5 minutes, that can save you some energy. You need to go beyond what is already required by the new codes. If you do high-end tuning, you set the maximum light level space-by-space to go beyond the standard. Reflective window shades can save 10 to 20% in cooling costs. Use automated shades to further save on your lighting, because when there are manual shades what usually happens is that people close the shades or close the blinds and then never open them again. An automatic shading system will automatically open to let in sunlight and take

Page 108: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

108

advantage of the natural light. Automated shading tied in with occupancy and daylight sensors have been shown to save 10 to 15 % in lighting costs.

When to Use Option 2

For the prescriptive requirements of Option 2 check out the ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guide. The specific prescriptive requirements are based on the building type – office, retail, school, or hospital. If the building doesn’t meet the size and building type the project must pursue Option 1 or Option 3. The architect and engineer will work together to determine what requirements must be met. Note the prescriptive requirements in ASHRAE 90.1-2010 are not the same as in the advanced energy design guide. For Option 2 and Option 3 the project must meet the prescriptive requirements of ASHRAE 90.1-2010 for the building envelope, HVAC, service water, heating, and lighting. Then meet the prescriptive requirements for the HVAC and service water heating equipment from the Advanced Energy Design Guide.

When to use Option 3

Option 3 is similar to Option 2, where the project team will first meet the prescriptive requirements of ASHRAE 90.1-2010 for the building envelope, HVAC, service water, heating, and lighting. Then review the prescriptive requirements of the Core Performance Guide. Projects choosing this option can’t earn any points under the credit. This option requires achieving all of the prescriptive requirements of sections 1 and 2 of the core performance guide, and three strategies from section 3. For this option analyze at least three alternative building configurations to maximize passive reduction of building energy loads.

Timeline

It can’t be stressed enough to start your energy planning from day one. It’s one of the reasons the Integrative Process Credit requires performing a preliminary “simple box” energy modeling analysis before the completion of schematic design. In addition, set goals early. Project teams can use Energy Star’s target finder to help pick an energy use target for the building. This will be helpful for teams pursuing points under the credit. The energy use target helps prioritize strategies. Project teams should begin energy modeling early in the design phase. Energy performance is a prerequisite so you want to get this right by starting early and assembling the documentation to show compliance. For projects pursuing the credit an energy performance target must be selected no later than the schematic design phase.

Page 109: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

109

If saving money on energy is important, ask yourself how you go about doing that. Talk with the team and discuss what the overall goals of the project are. Discuss what numbers the team wants to hit, and stick to them. Follow up with a computer model to make sure the project is going to hit the desired number.

Calculations

The calculations are something the specialized energy modeler would do with software. There are area calculations, lighting, power, and energy model simulation calculations. Minimum Energy Performance is consistently one of the most difficult credits and prerequisites to document. For other LEED credits project teams can submit the documentation and it passes review about 50% of the time. For energy performance that drops to about 5%. The credit calculations are in an Excel spreadsheet. The sheets assist energy modelers in developing the ASHRAE 90.1 Appendix G building energy models. The inputs include specific information about the baseline and proposed ASHRAE modeling requirements, and provide the energy modeler with quality control checks for the energy modeling inputs and outputs. Prior to LEED submission the energy modeler should confirm that the energy model inputs listed are consistent with those modeled, and provide quality control to confirm that the outputs are reasonable based on the energy inputs listed. The sheets also highlight all of the things the project team should be paying attention to as they build the energy model, as well as including quality assurance checks for things that frequently get overlooked or submitted incorrectly. When one part of the spreadsheet gets updated the information is reflected elsewhere to update these checks. Don’t make a mistake about filling out the spreadsheet until near the completion of the building, or you might find some of the ASHRAE mandatory requirements were overlooked or the modeling requirements weren’t addressed.

Sample Question

A whole building energy simulation resulted in a baseline building performance of $112,488 for a new school. What minimum improvement in building performance is needed for LEED certification? For EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance and EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance the modeled energy savings are reported based on the energy cost, using the states’ average energy prices. There’s some important information here that helps you. For this credit you’re comparing a baseline to a design case. The baseline for the building has a performance

Page 110: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

110

of $112,488 for a new school. Ask yourself, “New buildings require a 5 percent improvement as opposed to 3% for a renovation, so what is the minimum performance?” Multiply 5 percent times the overall number here.

Sample Question

What criteria are not used to determine what prescriptive measures must be followed when using the ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guide to calculate minimum energy performance? A. Climate zone in which the building is located B. Square footage of the building C. Type of building D. Building orientation Read this a second time to say, “What criteria are not used.” All of these are criteria that are used except for one. Option 2 is for the prescriptive compliance path using ASHRAE 50% Advanced Energy Design Guide requires the building type, the square footage, and the climate zone determine what applicable criteria the project must meet. The ASHRAE whole building energy performance includes the building orientation in the modeling. What modeling does beyond written guidelines, is to look at your building from four different sides relative to the sun’s path of travel. The prescriptive measures do not take into account the sun’s position. D is the correct answer.

EA Credit 2 | Optimize Energy Performance

Option 1 is a whole building energy simulation and can earn 1 to 18 points, except Healthcare which can earn 1 to 20 points and Schools which can earn 1 to 16 points.

Option 2 is Prescriptive compliance using the ASHRAE Advanced Energy Design Guide. Projects can earn 1 to 6 points.

Point Thresholds

Remember in the prerequisite new construction projects start at a 5% improvement, major renovations a 3% improvement, and core and shell a 2% improvement. The reference guide or rating system has the complete table with the percentages and points for each increment of improvement. It’s a big table so check it out. You’ll notice the increments change from 2% to 3% as the improvements increase. For example new

Page 111: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

111

construction starts with 6%, 8%, 10%, on up to 26%, 29%, 32%, up to a maximum of 50%.

Option 2 – Prescriptive Path

Option 2 is the prescriptive path. Projects earn points by following the appropriate ASHRAE design guide based on the project type and climate zone. To choose this option a project must have done Option 2 in the Minimum Energy Performance Prerequisite. Note here in the option 2 prescriptive path there are only one to 6 points available. As you study this credit think about that as a big differentiator between these options. The whole building energy simulation is the optimal choice for achieving the most points. Here is an example for a K through 12 school building. Building envelope, opaque: roofs, walls, floors, slabs, and doors (1 point)

Building envelope, glazing: vertical fenestration (1 point)

Interior lighting, including daylighting and interior finishes (1 point)

Exterior lighting (1 point)

Plug loads, including equipment choices, controls, and kitchen equipment (1 point)

If you review all the building types you will notice they are all very similar with minor variations between each type. It’s important to note the differences between each type.

How to design Energy Efficiency

First, reduce demand. Think about the building orientation and reducing the size of the building footprint. Installing better insulation and having a tighter envelope are cheaper ways to reduce demand. Next, harvest free energy. Day lighting is sustainable practice and generally reduces the amount of lighting installed. However, daylighting is a passive solar strategy, as opposed to an active strategy like solar power. Natural ventilation is like day lighting, it passively allows reduces energy demands on mechanical systems, but isn’t awarded points directly for its own value. The energy model compares these benefits in the design case to conventional design in the baseline case. Then, look at your required systems and find ways to increase efficiency. Increase efficiency in HVAC, lighting, water heating. Think about, “Is the boiler the right size? Do we have too many lights? Are we using daylight sensors?” Or if it was the mechanical system, “Are we using the most efficient fans, motors and such?”

Page 112: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

112

Finally, where available, recover waste energy. Exhaust air energy recovery has synergies with increasing ventilation.

Variable Factors

Project teams using energy simulation software should consider the following criteria: Schedule of operation

Building orientation

Building envelope

Lighting systems

HVAC&R systems

Process energy

Energy rates

Hot water systems

Making improvements in each variable add up to large savings. Projects that go above and beyond the point threshold earn an innovation point. In this case, new buildings would need a 54 percent improvement from the baseline and existing buildings need 52 percent improvement. People might ask, “What if I have a 70 percent improvement?” Projects would only achieve one innovation point for that, but ideally, your best savings are decreased energy bills and increased performance to your building. The last step is refining your energy performance to meet the project goals. Often people calculate the results, throw up their hands and say, “Oh, well, here’s where we are as far as energy savings.” On a project you may find a certain level of energy savings and say, “That doesn’t meet our goal.” The mechanical engineer and the electrical engineer might meet with the energy modeler and ask them, “What can we change? How can we alter this in order to get better performance?” You see a lot of the same information here in option 1 because it’s really the same process. The same person doing the minimum energy performance measurement would complete the documentation for this credit because they are exactly the same.

Case Study

From a visible, tangible aspect, the most energy efficient feature of the HKS headquarters in Dallas, Texas is the LED lighting system that’s fully integrated with a window shade system. It is a complete daylight autonomy system. There are daylight sensors and occupancy sensors.

Page 113: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

113

One of HKS’ most impressive energy achievements is reducing the lighting power density down to 0.6 watts per square foot. The hard work to get this number came from smart lighting design and using 95% LED through the entire project. However the lighting only runs at about 75% of the time because the employees said they could work with less light. Each desk has task lighting with built in sensors. When the light doesn’t sense any motion it turns itself off, further saving energy. Conference rooms are equipped with vacancy sensors instead of occupancy sensors. Occupancy sensors automatically turn on the lights as someone walks in the room, but because the rooms have natural light HKS has found employees will walk into a room and never turn on the lights. When the employees do use the lights, the vacancy sensors will turn them off when the occupants leave the room.

EA Prerequisite 3 | Building-level Energy Metering

This prerequisite is new in LEED v4 and it mirrors the water metering prerequisite requirements. In addition to making buildings accountable for comprehensive energy, whole building energy metering is required to measure and track on-going energy efficiency. In the past, LEED points used to be based on predicted usage, and now LEED is requiring projects to measure their actual performance. That’s working towards raising the bar for building design. This is a two-part prerequisite: meter and report energy data. Some project teams may ask – why does the USGBC want this information? If the building scores worse than predicted, will my plaque be taken away? No, nothing to worry about there. For years LEED has been certifying projects and not knowing what happens after the plaque is put up. Sharing metering data helps everyone learn what strategies produce measureable results, and which have inflated value. We look a lot at energy consumption of systems, but one of the biggest oversights in predictive models has been underestimating or overestimating the amount of energy that people use in their buildings. Consequently, metering is a valuable tool to enable facility managers to better understand energy usage based on human factors. Metering also helps connect LEED BD+C and LEED O+M. For years USGBC required metering for existing building projects, but since new construction projects didn’t always install whole-building meters as a common practice, it became more of a challenge. Now the facility managers are having discussions with the design team in the new construction projects, and there is a greater synergy between the rating systems.

Page 114: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

114

Requirements

Install new or use existing building-level energy meters, or submeters that can be aggregated to provide building-level data representing total building energy consumption (electricity, natural gas, chilled water, steam, fuel oil, propane, biomass, etc). Utility-owned meters capable of aggregating building-level resource use are acceptable. The project building must be separately metered from other buildings or structures, even if they are owned by the same party. Projects must commit to sharing the data with the USGBC for a five-year period beginning on the date the project accepts LEED certification or typical occupancy, whichever comes first. At a minimum, energy consumption must be tracked at one-month intervals, which is pretty easy since most electric bills occur in monthly cycles anyway. The challenge is reporting the data. Project teams can either send their data to the USGBC when requested, or be proactive and report online through the EPA’s Energy Star Portfolio Manager program. The portfolio manager tool is not only a path for prerequisite compliance, but also a great resource for facility managers to trend energy use patterns. This commitment must carry forward for five years. These are your key dates – 5 years commitment for data, at one month intervals, beginning on the date the project accepts LEED certification or typical occupancy, whichever comes first.

EA Credit 3 | Advanced Energy Metering

For even more accuracy and clarity on actual energy use demands, projects can earn points for installing additional submeters. First, projects must install advanced energy metering for all whole building energy sources used by the building. Whole building systems include: Electricity

Natural Gas

Propane

Steam

Chilled water

On-site Renewable

Geothermal

Page 115: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

115

Major End Uses

Secondly, projects must also have advanced energy metering for any individual energy end uses that represent 10% or more of the total annual consumption of the building. These systems include: Primary HVAC systems

Secondary HVAC systems

Lighting

Plug loads

Elevators

Processes

Only those systems with individual energy end uses that represent 10% or more of the total annual consumption of the building need to be monitored – fans, chillers, pumps, etc. The path to analyze the data is a bit more flexible than having to go back and do a calibrated simulation. The data has to be gathered at least hourly, and be able to communicate that data remotely. All of the data must be stored for at least 36 months.

Is it worthwhile?

Submeters are important, because without detailed feedback, problems are going to cost extra money and extra time to detect and fix. A whole building energy meter is a good start, but it can only tell you yes, or no that your building is operating as designed. If your building is consistently exceeding predicted usage, how will you know what system to adjust? Submeters will tell you exactly where the excess occurring. Architects, engineers, and managers will want to use this data to do things differently in the next building. How can you improve the design or setpoints? Without the right data, you don’t know. It’s why the energy model, the advanced metering, and the monitoring are an important combination. For example, ff you find a load in the building is only 15% of the total, the potential ROI for reducing that in the new building is pretty limited. But if you find the lighting load is 40% of your total, you now know where you can focus on for improvement and where you can find a significant reduction in your electric bill in your next project. It may be you find an issue with what was done in the simulation, and what actually occurred during one specific month because of the weather. That’s why the requirement is to report data hourly, daily, monthly, and annually. The comparison of the simulation and actual data can help identify patterns or discrepancies.

Page 116: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

116

In one case a university started metering and found that one of the compressors had been bad. It was a multiple compressor unit and the one compressor had been bad for over a year. It was causing more energy use because the system couldn’t keep up. The building was still comfortable so nobody noticed but it was just using more energy.

Case Study

An audit conducted at Southern Connecticut State University revealed that computers, lights, and air conditioners left on overnight and on weekends were costing the University more than $100,000 a year. Simply turning off these devices when not in use would actually have a meaningful effect on the University’s $2.5 million annual electric bill. Realized dollar savings from such simple energy-saving actions could easily be applied in support of additional energy saving projects or directly to bolster academic programs. Sub-metering equipment, applicable in a variety of situations, has allowed SCSU to obtain savings of tens of thousands of dollars a month depending on the type of facility being metered. Savings like these are possible because advanced metering equipment, energy management, and control are directly in the hands of facility operators. By comparing historical energy usage with current kWh values, facility managers can identify energy savings opportunities that will guarantee the largest and quickest paybacks. New sub-metering systems can pinpoint which computers, lights, and air conditioners are on or off, and whether there might be a need to adjust operating schedules for larger system elements or equipment. Meter-derived data can reveal locations and situations that call for change-outs of equipment to more high efficient designs. The sub-metering connected to SCSU’s central energy management system is capable of recording eight electrical parameters on a daily basis (broken down into four time periods with 15 minute demand and Kwh for read-outs for each period). Peak demand times are also recorded. Sub-meters are installed on the secondary side of the switchgear in a building or facility. Besides having a lower cost, secondary sub-meters are much easier to install. Electricians can install them in about three hours while performing cleaning and maintenance of load centers or as a separate job. Additionally, the meters facilitate electricity monitoring without necessitating major interior changes in the building. Installation is simply a matter of hooking three current sensors around the electrical feeds and adding the three potential taps. The meter can be mounted anywhere. Average cost to purchase and install a sub-meter connected to the DDC system is approximately $3,000.

Page 117: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

117

EA Prerequisite 4 | Fundamental Refrigerant Management

The intent of this prerequisite is to reduce stratospheric ozone depletion. Refrigerants are an ozone depleting material. This prerequisite requires zero use of CFC-based refrigerants in HVAC&R systems. If your project is an existing building renovation that has a CFC based system already in it, the project must have a comprehensive phase out conversion to remove the CFC-based refrigerants.

Scope

All full sized refrigerant containing equipment is required in the scope of this prerequisite. However, small HVAC&R units, standard refrigerators, and any other equipment that contains less than 0.5 pound (225 grams) of refrigerant, are exempt from the calculations.

CFCs

New construction projects cannot install new CFC-based refrigeration due to the Montreal Protocol, which phased out CFCs for industrialized nations in 1995. However, CFCs may still be used in existing HVAC equipment prior to either 1995 in developed countries or 2010 in developing countries. The EPA set regulations on using and recycling ozone-depleting compounds as part of the Clean Air Act. Project teams must adhere to this standard to minimize refrigerant leakage for systems with existing CFC-containing equipment.

Two Paths

There are two different paths. One is the new building in which you’re just not going to install CFC based refrigerants. For new buildings, select refrigerants that have short environmental lifetimes, minimize any leakage, and establish safe removal and disposal of refrigerants. The fact of the matter is many of us are dealing with existing buildings which have existing CFC-based refrigerant systems. Insure proper maintenance on systems to minimize leakage. Replace or retrofit existing CFC-based equipment before the project’s completion. A post-occupancy phase-out can occur in special circumstances.

EA Credit 6 | Enhanced Refrigerant Management

The intent of this credit is to reduce ozone depletion and support early compliance with the Montreal Protocol while minimizing direct contributions to climate change.

Page 118: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

118

Reduced Impact

Fundamental Refrigerant management is pretty clean cut – use no CFC-based refrigerants and have a phase out plan for existing buildings. This eliminates the most harmful refrigerant. Enhanced Refrigerant Management takes it a few steps further and requires project teams to use the least impactful refrigerants to earn points. Option 1 No refrigerants or low-impact refrigerants can earn one point. Option 2 Calculations of refrigerant impact can earn one point.

Option 1 | Lowest Impact

Option 1 is to not use refrigerants at all, or naturally occurring or synthetic refrigerants. This is a simple option, with minimal impacts, but it is rarely done. Most commonly, projects with natural ventilation can comply with no refrigerants when the building is in a very supportive climate region. Most natural, or low- impact refrigerants are cost prohibitive because they require additional energy demand to operate at the same capacity as the more potent products. To comply with this option, projects may only use refrigerants with 0 ODP and maximum of 50 GWP.

Option 2 | Calculation

Option 2 is selecting equipment with a combination of low ODP, Ozone Depleting Potential, and GWP, Global Warming Potential. The table here shows some of the available refrigerants and their ODP and GWP values. The refrigerant impacts along with the expected equipment life can be used to calculate the impact of the proposed system design.

Refrigerant  ODPr  GWPr  Application 

CFC‐11  1.0  4,680  Chiller 

HCFC‐22  0.04  1,780  Air conditioner 

HCFC‐123  0.02  76  CFC‐11 replacement 

HFC‐134a  0  1,320  HCFC‐22 replacement 

HFC‐407c  0  1,700  HCFC‐22 replacement 

HFC‐410a  0  1,890  Air conditioner 

Ammonia  0  0  Industrial Cold Storage 

Equipment is assumed to have a life of 10 years, a leakage rate of 2% per year and end of life refrigerant loss of 10%. These values along with the refrigerant charge are plugged into some formulas to determine the impact. The refrigerant charge is the ratio of the total refrigerant used, to the cooling capacity measuring in pounds per ton, or kilograms

Page 119: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

119

per kilowatt. To comply with this option, projects must demonstrate a refrigerant impact less than 100.

Scope

The combination of all new and existing base building and tenant HVAC&R equipment that serve the project must comply with the requirements. Even if the owner does not install or control the equipment, they must ensure that it meets credit requirements. If a tenant installs their own HVAC unit on the rooftop to cool their own computer closet, and the HVAC unit doesn’t comply, the project can’t earn this credit. Therefore, future tenants are key members to coordinate with during the overall design process.

Approach

For the least impact, consider natural ventilation, or even mixed mode when possible. This way your project doesn’t rely solely on hazardous refrigerants for comfort. If you can’t use CFCs, what can you use? There are options, but it’s going to take some work to do the calculations to make sure your design will serve the building occupants. The mechanical engineer will select the proper refrigerants and minimize refrigerant impact. In addition, select fire suppression, direct energy systems, and systems with a long service life. Window air-conditioning units and heat pumps have service lives of 10 years

Unitary, split and packaged air-conditioning units and heat pumps have service lives of 15 years

Reciprocating compressors and reciprocating chillers have service lives of 20 years

Centrifugal and absorption chillers have service lives of 23 years

Finally, when using the Retail rating system adaptation, and installing commercial refrigeration systems, it is required to test the leakage rate. Projects must demonstrate no more than 15% emission leakage rate using GreenChill’s best practices guide.

Case Study

One of the world’s largest airports is also one of the greenest. At the heart of Heathrow Airport’s Terminal 5 (T5) is a virtually HFC-free central ammonia chilling plant. To make the vast T5 virtually independent from the use of ozone-depleting and high global warming HCFCs and HFCs, all heating and cooling is done by a dedicated energy center providing continuous supply of hot and chilled water for heating and air-

Page 120: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

120

conditioning respectively. All chillers operate with the non-ozone depleting and non-global warming refrigerant ammonia. This natural substance was selected by the airport authority because it was recognized as a future proof solution offering excellent efficiency. A thorough risk analysis and safety review removed every concern regarding the system design and the installation’s safety, and confirmed that ammonia would not pose any greater risk to the public or the airport staff than any other conventional large chiller solution. In fact, large ammonia chillers had been already used before in more densely populated applications without any safety compromises. UK manufacturer Johnson Controls / Sabroe supplied Heathrow’s central chilling plant with four energy efficient chillers, each with a cooling capacity of 6.6 mW, or 1,875 tons. The units, powered by high-voltage electricity, use twin compressors ensuring a good part load performance, while the 11 kV motors reduce transformer losses. Safety features include a minimal refrigerant volume through plate heat exchangers, separate sealed compartments, a leak detection system, and an electrical switching outside the compartments. As the large-scale R717 chillers deliver higher efficiencies than smaller local chillers, they reduce energy consumption by at least 30% and possibly more from the chilled water store benefit. Storing the chilled water reduces the system capacity and takes advantage of night electricity rates.

EA Credit 4 | Demand Response

The intent of this credit is to increase participation in demand response technologies and programs that make energy generation and distribution systems more efficient, increase grid reliability, and reduce greenhouse gas emissions. The official definition of demand response is a change in electricity use by demand-side resources from their normal consumption patterns in response to supply-side requests. The utility company, or supply-side, changes the price of electricity or incentivizes payments to induce lower electricity consumption at times of high wholesale market prices or when system reliability is jeopardized. A simplified definition demand response is balancing customers' need for electricity with the power company's output. Participant’s voluntarily enroll in the program and reduce energy during peak demand. When you turn on an appliance, you expect immediate results: You don't wait for a light bulb to come on after you've flipped the switch. That's the power grid at work-always on, always ready. Electricity is generated at a power plant and transmitted to local substations where transformers turn it into a usable voltage. Then it's distributed into our homes and businesses through a network of high voltage transmission lines – aka the grid.

Page 121: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

121

From day to day, electricity consumers use a predictable minimum amount of power, called the baseload. At the very least, the grid is designed to handle this scheduled energy demand, in addition to any usage spikes that happen. Demand for electricity is typically highest in the afternoon and early evening, especially during the summertime when air conditioners run day and night. When everyone is using their electrical appliances at the same time, it's called peak usage time. Until your power is knocked out, you probably don't pay much attention to how often you turn on a light or the television or what time of day you do it. When you flip on a light switch, electricity travels in an instant to your home and the bulb glows -- that's called demand. When millions of electricity customers all turn on their air conditioners after work, it increases the demand load on the grid. Our demand for electricity is growing and the Energy Information Administration estimates that demand will rise at least 40 percent by 2030. The power grid supplies only the electricity we ask for, though, and it's up to us to practice energy conservation. In broad terms, demand response programs give us -- residential, commercial and industrial consumers -- the ability to voluntarily trim our electricity usage at specific times of the day (such as peak hours) during high electricity prices, or during emergencies (such as preventing a blackout).

Limited Availability

Case 1 can earn 2 points and is for projects located in an area where the utility company offers a demand response program. Demand response is still relatively new so it isn’t available everywhere. Contact your electricity provider to find out what options are available. Case 2 can earn 1 point and is for projects located in an area without a demand response program available. This option requires the building to install local infrastructure and contact your utility about participation in future programs.

Case 1 - Participation

Case 1 requires a project to participate in a demand response program. There are several activities that have to be completed: Design a system to provide real-time, fully-automated DR based on external

requests by a DR Program Provider. Semi-automated DR may also be used, and those two types of system will be covered later.

Enroll in a minimum one-year DR contract with a qualified DR program provider, for at least 10% of the estimated peak electricity demand (determined

Page 122: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

122

under EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance). Have an intention for multi-year renewal.

Develop a plan to achieve the contractual requirements during a Demand Response event.

Include the DR processes in the commissioning plan and perform at least one full test of the DR plan.

The key point to remember is shedding at least 10% of the building’s estimated peak electric usage.

Case 2 - Advocacy

Case 2 requires designing the building in a manner that enables it to participate in a demand response program when it becomes available. Projects have to install recording meters, develop a load shedding plan, include the system in commissioning, and contact utility representatives to discuss future DR programs. Basically you are getting the building ready for a program, if and when the program is released by the utility company.

Types of Systems

Demand response systems can be manual, semi-automated, or fully-automated. LEED does not allow project to use a manual system, that’s important to remember. Manual systems involve intensive human intervention to activate. More advanced uses of demand response, such as systematically shifting load to off-peak times requires some form of automation, and consequently the installation of an energy management control system (EMCS) or building automation system (BAS). BAS is a demand response tool that allows building managers to program the building's equipment and appliances in such a way that they automatically power down in response to peak load events, reducing the building's load demand in times of peak usage and/or peak pricing.

Manual demand response does not use a BAS. People manually turn off lights and equipment when asked to do so. This is not an option for LEED.

Semi-automated demand response uses a BAS. A person initiates a control strategy— preprogrammed into the BAS—when a demand response event is called.

Fully automated demand response (“AutoDR”) also uses a BAS. Receipt of an external price, reliability, or event signal automatically triggers a BAS control sequence that switches the building to low- power mode; no human intervention is required.

Page 123: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

123

Demand response is something you will need to contact your utility provider about early on to see if a program is available. The minimum reduction is 10% in peak electricity demand, so the project team will need to review the energy model from EA prerequisite minimum energy performance to determine what quantity that will be. If a project used the prescriptive paths for the prerequisite this credit can still be earned. In these cases projects can use space peak load calculations to estimate the peak demand.

Case Study

If you think demand response isn’t going to work for your project, take a look at this case study on the extreme end of the spectrum - a refrigerated warehouse for perishable food. In 2010, Railex,1 a nationwide full-service transport, logistics and distribution firm, built a new 225,000 sf distribution center. The building was built for high-performance, and soon business was growing and operating expenses increased. Railex contacted their utility, Southern California Edison (SCE), and asked how they could lower their energy costs. The answer was Auto-DR. SCE offered Railex a $72,400 incentive to install the required controls. The remainder of the expenses was repaid in four months from the savings during DR events. Over two years, Railex has averaged 9-15 peak events in summer months only. Although their energy use increased by 35% in one year, participation in the DR program kept their electricity costs the same.

EA Credit 5 | Renewable Energy Production

The intent of this credit is to reduce the environmental and economic harms associated with fossil fuel energy by increasing self-supply of renewable energy. Onsite renewable energy systems offset building energy costs and reduce greenhouse gas emissions. Your building may not become more efficient, but you reduce the cost of energy and lessen your environmental footprint.

Calculations

The renewable energy produced is expressed as a percent of the annual energy cost. What people generally do is look at their total building energy performance, then look at how much renewable energy they’re producing, and calculate a percentage.

1 https://www.sce.com/wps/wcm/connect/109348ba-7680-43f6-839f-6b7651b583ff/CaseStudy_Railex_AA.pdf?MOD=AJPERES

Page 124: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

124

For projects that did not do an energy model the Commercial Building Energy Consumption Survey (CBECS) database can be used to estimate the annual energy use and cost.

Renewable 

Energy 

Points all 

rating systems 

Points Core 

and Shell only 

1%  1  1 

3%  ‐  2 

5%  2  3 

10%  3  ‐ 

Community Systems

New in LEED v4 is the ability to include the use of solar gardens or community renewable energy systems if both of the following requirements are met. The project owns the system or has signed a lease agreement for a period of at

least 10 years.

The system is located with the same utility service area as the facility claiming the use.

Credit is based on the percentage of ownership or percentage of use assigned in the lease agreement.

Implementation

Eligible on-site systems for this credit include: Photovoltaic systems

Wind energy systems

Solar thermal systems

Biofuel-based electrical systems

Geothermal heating systems

Geothermal electric systems

Low-impact hydroelectric systems

Wave and tidal power systems

Some geothermal systems

Generally projects mistakenly undersize their renewable energy systems. If you can oversize the systems, it creates a safety net and you potentially become a power supplier to your local energy provider. This is called net metering and your system can become a small profit center.

Page 125: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

125

Scope

It’s important for you to know what onsite systems are eligible. Some biofuels that can’t be included are: Burning trash

Forest biomass other than mill residue

Wood covered with paints and coatings

Preserved wood, such as pressure treated lumber

Those biofuels that are not eligible have a high greenhouse gas potential or toxicity potential.

Calculations

The percent of renewable energy cost is calculated by dividing the equivalent cost of usable energy produced by the renewable energy system, by the total estimated building annual energy cost which you will find in EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance. Manufacturers will be able to assist with the calculations based on the information they provide about their systems. The percent of renewable energy cost is calculated by dividing the equivalent cost of usable energy produced by the renewable energy system, by the total estimated building annual energy cost. Usable energy is defined as the output energy from the system less any transmission and conversion losses, such as standby heat loss or losses when converting electricity from DC to AC. So while you may install an 8kW PV array, that doesn’t mean you’re building gets 8kW of output or you use 8kW in the calculation. The equivalent cost of the usable energy system can be calculated in two ways – either by using a virtual rate or actual utility tariff plus demand rates. This is beyond the scope of this study guide, so check out the reference guide for the fine grained details.

Case Study

The Brewster Community Solar Garden Project is a large solar array located in a field adjacent to the Brewster Water Department. In Brewster’s industrial zone, the field is a former sand pit and debris disposal location—a site unsuitable for most other development. The facility is constructed and maintained by My Generation Energy, Inc., also a Brewster-based company and a leader in community solar installations in Massachusetts.

Page 126: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

126

The solar power is “delivered” to the site every day, welcomed by a large array of 1,440 highly-efficient and US made Sharp panels. The panels generate electricity which is then conditioned and metered to the utility grid at the site. Through “virtual net metering” the credit from the project’s utility account is then transferred to the accounts of the Brewster Community Solar Garden Cooperative members. Each member’s SunShare entitles the member to the equivalent of 28 panels of energy each month. The facility provides enough locally grown solar energy to power dozens of businesses and households in Brewster.

EA Credit 7 | Green Power and Carbon Offsets

The intent is to encourage the reduction of greenhouse gas emissions through the use of renewable energy technologies and carbon mitigation projects. Green Power and Carbon Offsets are different than any of the other credits we talked about in one distinct way. First of all, it’s a five year contract for financial investment in at least 50 percent of the building’s electricity from green power, renewable energy certificates, or carbon offsets. More importantly, it is the only credit that allows strategies to be fully designed and implemented by a third party off-site.

Credit Synergy

Projects earn one point for a 50% offset, and 2 points for a 100% offset. The percentages are based on the quantity of energy the project consumes, as determined by the project’s annual energy consumption. This credit factors all of the energy used in the building, not just the electric energy use. If your building uses natural gas for heat in the winter, you must include that usage too. Green power and carbon offsets are calculated based on the energy consumed by the project. This is different than Energy and atmosphere credit Renewable Energy Production, which is based on cost.

Timeline

For the Green Power and Carbon Offset credit, the building owner is looking at a long term commitment to earn this credit – at least 5 years. This credit is not a one-time purchase, it is a yearly purchase for a minimum of 5 years. That is something to consider when deciding to pursue this credit.

Page 127: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

127

Marketplace

What is green power? Not to be confused with onsite renewable energy production, green power is a subset of renewable energy composed of grid-based electricity produced from renewable energy sources. To be considered a qualified resource, the renewable project must have come online since January 1, 2005. Visit to green-e.org for detailed descriptions on how green power works for this credit. The idea is your electricity provider is adding renewable energy to the grid on your behalf. By purchasing 50 percent of your power over five years from a green-e provider, you are subsidizing green power. You’re paying not just for power, but also the difference for them to provide this power to the grid. The provider is not plugging green power into your building. You’re subsidizing them providing green power to the grid.

Referenced Standards

Any Green Power and RECs must be certified by Green-e. Carbon offsets must be Green-e Climate certified or an equivalent.

RECs

The way most people achieve this credit is purchasing Green-e Renewable Energy Certificates (REC). By purchasing RECs, the project obtains the environmental attribute of renewable energy. Beyond the LEED application, building owners can use RECs to balance their carbon emissions on corporate sustainability reports. Teams can call any Green-e certified provider and get a quote in cents per kilowatt hour cost. Getting that quote would help you understand this credit.

Green Power

Project teams may purchase green power directly, where available. For the Green Power calculations you need to know your design energy cost and your default electricity consumption. Here’s a little bit of the math. Let’s say a project uses a million kilowatt hours per year. Multiply that by 50 percent. The project would need to purchase 500,000 kilowatt hours annually for a minimum of 5 years. The provider would multiply that by 0.2 cents per kilowatt hour (or whatever the rate is), and then they would charge the building owner that amount each year.

Page 128: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

128

Carbon Offsets

The newest recognition for GHG accounting is carbon offsets. For the credit, the minimum purchase is 50% of the building’s annual GHG emissions. Carbon offsets are proactive strategies to capture or sequester carbon in biological, agricultural, or clean-fuel technologies. Examples include planting trees and changing from conventional to no-till farming. For LEED, the overall equation is: consumption, times the CO2 emissions factor, equals the GHG emissions, or CO2 equivalent. What you are purchasing is carbon offsets, so you have to determine the total metric tons of CO2 equivalent the building is putting out for both grid-generated electricity and nonelectrical energy (such as natural gas). This is not difficult to calculate at all. We’ll walk through the terminology and an example as well.

Types of Emissions

Total emissions is the primary metric, quantifying the majority of GHG associated with commercial buildings. It can be broken down into component metrics, direct and indirect emissions. Direct emissions, scope 1, are emissions from fuel that is directly burned at your building, for example natural gas that may be combusted to heat your property. Indirect emissions, scope 2, are emissions associated with energy purchased from a utility, for example emissions associated with the generation of electricity or district steam. To calculate the project’s total emissions, first you have to know how much energy the building is estimated to use, and the different types of energy. This data already has to be determined from Energy & Atmosphere Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance.

GHG Emission Factors

For the calculations you will need to know the direct and indirect GHG emission factors for different fuel types as defined in the ENERGY STAR portfolio manager. These tables are listed in the LEED reference guide.

Page 129: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

129

Shown here is a table for direct greenhouse gas emission factors.

Fuel type  Mt CO2e/kBtu Mt CO2e/kWh

Natural gas  5.32 × 10‐5 1.82 × 10‐4

Fuel oil (No. 2)  7.36 × 10‐5 2.51 × 10‐4

Wood  1.02 × 10‐4 3.47 × 10‐4

Propane  6.35 × 10‐5 2.17 × 10‐4

Liquid propane  6.36 × 10‐5 2.17 × 10‐4

Kerosene  7.27 × 10‐5 2.48 × 10‐4

Fuel oil (No. 1)  7.36 × 10‐5 2.51 × 10‐4

Fuel oil (Nos. 5 and 6)  7.92 × 10‐5 2.70 × 10‐4

Coal (anthracite)  1.04 × 10‐4 3.56 × 10‐4

Coal (bituminous)  9.42 × 10‐5 3.21 × 10‐4

Coke  1.14 × 10‐4 3.90 × 10‐4

Fuel oil (No. 4)  7.36 × 10‐5 2.51 × 10‐4

Diesel  7.36 × 10‐5  2.51 × 10‐4 

Calculations

To calculate direct GHG emissions: 1. All billed or metered site energy consumption for each fuel is converted from

native units to MBtu. Fuels that are delivered, billed, or measured in mass or volume units (i.e., cubic feet, tons, gallons) are converted to energy using standard heat content factors.

2. Total site energy for each fuel is multiplied by a single CO2-equivalent factor that incorporates the reference global warming potential of each gas. In the US, these factors are computed at the national level (each fuel has one factor).

3. Direct emissions are summed together across all fuels (e.g., oil, gas, etc) and reported as a Direct Emissions Metric.

4. Direct emissions are also added to the Total GHG Emissions.

Example

Let’s say your energy model shows your office building is going to consume 5,000,000 kWh of electricity per year, and 1,000,000 kBtu of natural gas. The natural gas is a direct GHG emission. The ENERGY STAR direct GHG emissions factor of natural gas is 5.32 times ten to the minus fifth of metric tons of CO2 equivalent per kBtu.

Page 130: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

130

1,000,000 kBtu per year times 5.32 times ten to the minus fifth metric tons of CO2 equivalent per kBtu which equals 53.2 metric tons of CO2 equivalent per year. You multiplied two numbers – easy. The next step is to calculate indirect GHC emissions. Indirect emissions result from the purchase of a utility-supplied energy product such as electricity or district heat. When these secondary forms of energy are purchased, emissions occur at the plant where the heat/electricity was originally produced. These factors are applied to your site energy consumption and take into account emissions associated with the heat (or power) generation. However, the emissions associated with energy losses from the delivery of that energy (e.g. along transmission and distribution lines) is attributed to the utility, not to your building. The main sources of indirect emissions are electricity, district steam, district hot water, and district cold water. In our project example we had 5,000,000 kWh of purchased electricity per year. ENERGY STAR has an emission factor of 5.90 times 10 to the minus forth per metric ton of CO2 equivalent per kWh. Doing that math is 5,000,000 kWh per year times 5.90 times 10 to the minus forth per metric ton of CO2 equivalent per kWh, which comes out to 2,950 metric tons of CO2 equivalent per year. It’s a mouthful when you say it, but again it’s just multiplying two numbers. For natural gas we had 53.2 metric tons and for electricity the project has 2,950 metric tons. The total output is 2,950 plus 53.2 equals 3,003 metric tons of CO2 equivalent per year. The project’s carbon offset would be 50% of this amount per year for 5 years to earn the credit, or 1,502 metric tons of CO2 equivalent per year. While that seemed like a lot of math and big terms, it boils down to taking the energy values from the prerequisite, and multiplying them by the emission factors provided in the reference guide, and multiplying that total by 50%.

How to Choose

In summary your project team has to choose from purchasing green power, RECs, and/or offsets. The choices will vary by the project location. Carbon offsets can be used to offset non-electricity sources, such as natural gas. RECs, green power, or carbon offsets can be used to offset electricity sources. That is a key differentiator – carbon offsets are the only choice that can be used for both electricity and nonelectric energy.

Page 131: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

131

A cost-benefit analysis can align the project’s goals with the type of purchase that best fits. Carbon offsets are not all equal, some are for energy efficiency, some are for land or forest restoration and preservation. Whatever the project team chooses must be for a minimum 5 year commitment.

Net Zero

If the project is a net-zero building, the project can achieve 2 points for this credit without purchasing additional renewable energy, RECs, or offsets. To do this project must not sell any RECs associate with the on-site renewable energy production.

Energy and Atmosphere Synergies

Within the EA category, there are a number of synergies with commissioning because it is the oversight of energy systems. When you look at light pollution, that has an effect on energy, therefore it requires commissioning. In optimized energy performance there's a huge overlap, and then on and on through any credit related to energy. Remember when you see these Related Credits to think about how things sync up. For instance, how does one decision that affects commissioning also affect minimum indoor air quality performance, etc.

HVAC System Design

These are the same related credits we saw in Fundamental Commissioning. As you study, try to figure out how each of these fit in. For example, how is it that increased ventilation combines with Enhanced Commissioning? Think about a project that wants this credit and say, “Increased ventilation is going to be achieved by a certain fan power, then pulling air out through some exhaust fans.” Then you would think, “Well, that would be connected because Enhanced Commissioning would be looking for those fans on the construction drawings. They might be looking for those fans in the submittal process.” This is how commissioning would oversee an actual performance credit. Drawing those parallels is a great way to learn. Your refrigeration choice impacts the energy use. Less efficient refrigerants require more energy to achieve the same level of cooling as more efficient refrigerants. The gotcha is that more efficient refrigerants usually have higher ODP and/or GWP. You must strike a balance based on the project goals. Efficiency can also impact the design of the HVAC system.

Page 132: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

132

System Interdependency

Anything related to energy is really related to energy performance. You could even see things as distant as heat islands being tied to this, because the heat island effect has to do with how much a building is being heated by the heat retention from the roof. This relates to how much you cool the building, which relates to energy if the building is mechanically cooled. For water reduction, if you reduce the quantity of hot water, you reduce the energy needed to heat the hot water.

Integrative Process

Project teams pursuing the Integrative Process credit must complete the basic energy analysis for that credit before conducting the energy simulation for Energy and Atmosphere Optimize Energy Performance.

Page 133: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

133

Key Terms

Commissioning (Cx) Commissioning Agents (Cxa) Hvac Owner Project Requirements (Opr) Basis Of Design (Bod) Ashrae Guideline 0-2005 Ashrae Guideline 1.1–2007 Sequence Of Operations Seasonal Setpoints Preventive Maintenance Fundamental Vs. Enhanced Monitoring Based Commissioning (Mbcx) Building Enclosure Commissioning (Becx) Whole Building Energy Simulation Ashrae 90.1-2010 Return On Investment (Roi) Ashrae Advanced Energy Design Guide Appendix G Natural Ventilation Recover Waste Energy Building Orientation Chlorofluorocarbons (Cfc) Montreal Protocol Ozone Depleting Potential (Odp) Geothermal

Plug Loads Demand Response Load Shedding Energy Management Control System (Emcs) Building Automation System (Bas) Fully Automated Demand Response (Autodr) Commercial Building Energy Consumption Survey Cbecs Database Biofuels Recs Green-E Carbon Offsets Ghg Emission Factors Direct Emissions Indirect Emissions Scope 1 Scope 2 Net Zero

Page 134: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

134

Chapter 7 – Materials and Resources

Overview

LEED v4 is a “performance-based rating system.” It’s easy to visualize and measure the performance of water and energy systems, but what does resource performance look like? LEED has shifted the focus away from single attribute resource performance to incorporate all aspects of the environmental impacts from a material’s lifecycle. The Materials & Resources section is shaped around lifecycle thinking at both the whole-building and product levels. Lifecycle thinking refers to the entire span of existence from resource extraction to materials processing, product manufacture to construction, and building use to building demolition or deconstruction. The comprehensive goal of the credits in the new LEED version 4 is to encourage as much materials reuse as possible. Lifecycle thinking helps to overcome questions about end of life value. For example, whereas a material made from recycled content may perform quite high with respect to new resource extraction, it may not be particularly durable and therefore will require replacement much earlier than a material that’s built to last. Using lifecycle thinking, the LEED v4 credits will consider a complete, holistic picture of a material’s life, whether it be made of recycled content, salvaged from the existing building, or a bio-based resource. When we’re talking about lifecycle thinking, we’re not talking about any one phase. We want to incorporate all of the steps from raw materials to operation, and look at a full comparison of product options. Why is LCA a useful tool? It helps you see these tradeoffs and helps you look at the whole picture and not just one aspect. It helps you see across all these different stages. It gives us scientific methodology for doing these calculations and making these decisions. Of course, it’s only one decision. You’re still going to look at the product’s performance, other technical requirements, and the cost. LCA helps you have an environmental metric to add to your equation when you’re trying to decide what you want to do. It gives us the framework to have an apples to apples comparison on some of these products as well.

Overview

The Materials & Resources credit category has 2 prerequisites and 5 credits. MR Prerequisite 1 Storage and Collection of Recyclables

MR Prerequisite 2 Construction and Demolition Waste Management Planning

Page 135: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

135

MR Credit 1: Building life cycle impact reduction

MR Credit 2: Building product disclosure and optimization – environmental product declarations

MR Credit 3: Building product disclosure and optimization – sourcing of raw materials

MR Credit 4: Building product disclosure and optimization – material ingredients

MR Credit 5: Construction and demolition waste management

LEED v4 aims to increase market demand for manufacturer transparency. The MR section contains credits specifically aimed at building product disclosure and optimization.

Life Cycle Analysis

We can use LCA in a number of ways. We can look at it in a component and element level and we can look at whole building assessments. We can then actually understand how that transfers into our existing buildings and we can make sure we can understand that we can make better decisions when we refer to those buildings. In LEED what we have at the Building Level is a whole building LCA, where the building is the product. In this case, the architect can be the LCA expert as the architect understands how the building is constructed, how building materials and products flow to the job site and how the building is going to be operated over time.

At its core, LCA is defined at the material level. It is not likely that an architect or any building industry consultant would be called on to produce material-level Life Cycle Inventory data. This information is calculated by process chemists, chemical engineers and submitted for inclusion in various LCI databases that companies producing product LCA data use as a resource.

MR Prerequisite 1 | Storage and Collection of Recyclables

The intent of this prerequisite is to reduce the waste that is generated by building occupants and hauled to and disposed of in landfills.

Requirements

Provide an appropriately sized area that serves the entire building for recycling. You must collect the following streams of on-going consumables: paper, corrugated cardboard, glass, plastics, and metals. The recycle bins must be distributed throughout

Page 136: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

136

the whole building. Make recycling as convenient as possible. Think about ways to make the recycling stations convenient and they will be used more frequently.

Hazardous Waste

In addition to the ongoing consumables, the prerequisite requires safe collection, storage, and disposal of two of the following hazardous waste sources: batteries, mercury-containing lamps, and electronic waste. Since these waste streams are limited and infrequent, a single collection point for the whole building is reasonable. Electronic waste includes discarded office equipment (computers, monitors, copiers, printers, scanners, fax machines), appliances (refrigerators, dishwashers, water coolers), external power adapters, and televisions and other audiovisual equipment

Implementation

Provide well written signs placed in plain view make it easy for occupants to know what can be recycled, and where the materials should be placed. For example if you have a blue plastic recycling bucket with a label that says ‘aluminum cans’ on it, chances are nobody is going to throw cardboard into it. Convenience is one of the most important factors for getting employees to participate in the recycling program. In an office building, recycling areas could be placed in each office, and then have a collection area near where the garbage is picked up. Successful projects provide instructions. Let occupants know about the recycling program, or else they will not know to use it. If recycling activity disrupts occupants it can have a negative effect. Noise, foul orders, and air contaminants all need to be addressed. Label the recycling areas and collection strategies on your floor plans as part of the LEED documentation.

Rating System Adaptations

Retail has an adaptation for this prerequisite. Retail projects must do a waste stream audit to identify the project’s top five recyclable waste streams. The idea behind the audit is once again ‘you can’t manage what you don’t measure’. By analyzing the waste streams, retailers can get a better idea of where the waste is coming from and how best to divert it.

Page 137: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

137

The waste stream audit must be conducted over at least one 24-hour period. Once the audit is complete, list the top four waste streams for which the project will designate collection and storage space. To review those numbers: identify the top five recyclable waste streams over at least a 24 hour period. Provide dedicated and accessible collection areas for at least the top four waste streams identified in the audit.

MR Prerequisite 2 | Construction and Demolition – Waste Management Planning

The prerequisite is simply a plan, not a requirement to meet any thresholds or percentages of diversion rates. Projects need to report the diversion rates at the end of the project. In 1996, 136 million tons of construction & demolition (C&D) debris was generated – 57% by non-residential construction. Most of this waste could have been recycled, thereby reducing the demand for virgin materials. Waste reduction by recycling C&D debris can also turn a cost into a savings for builders. Instead of paying haulers to dispose of C&D debris from a job site, the materials can be sold to a recycling facility, or given to a recycling facility in exchange for free hauling. There are more than 6,000 centers around the United States that run specialized programs for reusing building materials. These programs are run by groups such as Goodwill, the Salvation Army, and Habitat for Humanity and include using unneeded materials in schools.

Document a Plan

Project teams must develop and implement a construction and demolition waste management plan. The plan must: 1. Establish waste diversion goals for the project by identifying at least five materials

(both structural and nonstructural) targeted for diversion. Approximate a percentage of the overall project waste that these materials represent.

2. Specify whether materials will be separated or commingled and describe the diversion strategies planned for the project. Describe where the materials will be taken and how the recycling facility will process the material.

Provide a final report detailing all major waste streams generated, including disposal and diversion rates.

Page 138: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

138

Educate and Collaborate

Establish requirements for waste reduction. First, make waste reduction a priority from the onset of the project and include it as a priority throughout the inception, design, implementation, and occupancy phases of construction. Secondly, establish specific waste reduction benchmarks and goals for each phase and assemble a team of qualified professionals experienced in environmentally sound design and construction practices to see it through. Identify materials that can be salvaged and reused. Include these goals and requirements for experience in requests for proposals and other contract documents. Monitor and support the program. Continually monitor the progress of waste reduction efforts by requiring contractors to submit the waste management plan and waste management progress reports. Support these efforts by identifying locations to collect and store recyclables on-site.

Architects, designers and specification writers also have specific roles in the process. They need to identify opportunities for waste reduction. Work with owners and developers to identify opportunities for waste reduction and public relation benefits. Select a contractor with proven waste reduction experience. A contractor experienced in reducing construction waste will keep the bid the same or may even lower the bid. An inexperienced contractor may increase the bid. Use a Construction Waste Management Specification. A Construction Waste Management Specification written with legally enforceable language is your most effective tool to ensure waste reduction happens successfully on your project. It is critical to monitor the waste reduction program. The architect and designer play an important role in assuring the contractor’s compliance with the waste reduction program. These individuals are responsible for requiring and reviewing waste management progress reports and invoices from recycling and garbage haulers and recycling facilities. By successfully monitoring the progress of the program and potential barriers, they can lead the discussion about the waste reduction program during the project meetings.

MR Credit 5 | Construction and Demolition Waste Management

This credit builds on the prerequisite. For this credit project teams are recycling and/or salvaging nonhazardous construction and demolition materials. Option 1: Diversion can earn 1 to 2 points. Option 2: Reduction of total waste material can earn 2 points.

Page 139: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

139

Option 1 | Diversion Percentage

Path one requires a 50% diversion of at least 3 of the material streams selected from the plan created for the prerequisite. Path two requires a 75% diversion of at least 4 of the material streams. LEED defines material streams as material flows coming from a job site into markets for building materials. For LEED a waste stream should constitute at least 5% by weight or volume of the projects totaled diverted waste. This can represent either a material category that is diverted in the specific way or a mixture of several material categories that are diverted in a specific way. For example if you are separating out wood and concrete into separate bins on site those are each considered one stream. If you have a mixed bin with both wood and concrete for offsite recycling that is considered one total stream.

Option 2 | 2.5 pounds / squarefoot

Option 2 requires generating no more than 2.5 pounds of construction waste per square foot (12.2 kilograms of waste per square meter) of the building's floor area. For this option you don’t have to go through the diversion process.

Exceptions

There are some things you can’t include in the calculations. Excavated soil, land-clearing debris, and alternative daily cover are all excluded from the calculations.

Implementation

Implementation is about good practices and identifying ways to divert waste from landfills. What a good general contractor is going to do is find places to take the material other than just throwing it to a debris bin and sending it off to the dump. Project can have separate containers (wood, drywall, metal, etc.) or have a single container for vendors that do commingled recycling. Regardless of your choice, your documentation has to be either in weight or volume. If you have a service that does commingled recycling for the project, they can provide you with a log once they take the debris away. The vendor can provide you with the actual log on how much materials you have recycled and how much was trash. If you're going in and doing demolition and there is a lot of carpet, many carpet factories will take that carpet and pick it up, sometimes for free. Make sure you quantify it. In a case where you can grind up the material, such as asphalt or concrete, and use it onsite,

Page 140: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

140

that counts as well. Donate to Habitat for Humanity or other causes as long as the debris is documented and you know what it weighed or what its volume was. Onsite, the containers need to be labeled appropriately. Hazardous materials and land-clearing debris doesn't count against you. Make sure you're using just the trash containers onsite.

Source Reduction

Eliminating waste at the source, known as source reduction, saves money and valuable landfill space. There are many opportunities to implement source reduction strategies on construction sites. The total waste generated by a project can be greatly reduced by considering waste generation during the design phase, employing conservative purchasing practices, and by reusing excess materials at the jobsite. Before construction begins, a construction waste management plan should be developed that identifies potential waste streams and where waste diversion can be put in place – salvage this waste, reuse it, and recycle it. If the waste can be taken out of the building and reused elsewhere, it avoids waste disposal in landfills and incinerators. Be sure the plan is actually put into practice and that the team tracks the waste through reports from the waste haulers to check that the waste management plan is actually working.

Advocacy

Work with suppliers to streamline purchasing: Request materials come with minimal or no packaging.

Purchase previously used or salvaged items (most building owners will welcome the opportunity to save money while conserving natural resources).

Determine where existing policies and procedures might represent a barrier to purchasing used or recycled materials.

Keep a binder of information on product specifications and prices and check back with manufacturers regularly for updates.

Document product performance, especially when materials exceed expectations or require special handling; establish a “feed-back loop” with the manufacturer by reporting usage information to them.

Ask suppliers to take back or buy back damaged or unused materials and packaging

Streamline supply estimations; make sure orders do not exceed your requirements.

Waste prevention can be more beneficial than recycling because it identifies potential waste early in the design process and decreases waste generated during construction.

Page 141: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

141

Design with standard sizes for all building materials. This avoids creating waste

when standard sized materials are cut to unusual lengths.

Design spaces to be flexible and adaptable to changing uses. This avoids creating waste during remodels.

Design for prefabricated components. Modular building components, or products that don’t need to be trimmed down onsite reduce waste.

Documentation

From your vendor you need waste haul tickets. Even though the project might extract soil and land, that doesn't count against the project. If you're taking out some trees with clumps of dirt, that won't count against you. This credit is focused on the construction materials. Actual land clearing wouldn't count against the project. If you have 30-yard dumpsters and you fill that up with wood, the calculations can be all volume in cubic yards, or weight. From experience, the weight usually is going to be the better measurement.

Waste-to-Energy

For some projects, waste-to-energy might be an option if reuse or recycling is not an option. Waste to energy focuses on the potential to improve the sustainable management of waste in Europe's regions, and to produce energy from waste. Directive 2006/12/EC of the European Parliament establishes the legislative framework for the handling of waste in the Community. It defines key concepts such as waste, recovery and disposal and puts in place the essential requirements for the management of waste, notably an obligation for an establishment or undertaking carrying out waste management operations to have a permit or to be registered and an obligation for the Member States to draw up waste management plans. It also establishes major principles such as an obligation to handle waste in a way that does not have a negative impact on the environment or human health, an encouragement to apply the waste hierarchy and, in accordance with the polluter-pays principle, a requirement that the costs of disposing of waste must be borne by the holder of waste, by previous holders or by the producers of the product from which the waste came.

Page 142: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

142

Case Study

The Boston Scientific Company undertook the renovation of a two-story, 30,000 square-foot office building as Phase 1 of a 2-building, 400,000 sq ft project. The general contractor was Payton Construction Corp.; SOS Corp. was the demolition subcontractor. The project involved gutting and replacement of interior furnishings and fittings, wall/partition systems, HVAC, electrical, plumbing, and membrane roof. The project was particularly complex because renovation began at the same time as demolition, so that employees could move into parts of the building while other areas were still in construction. The project was carried out to LEED Silver. The Total Waste Reduction was 92% (702 tons recycled, 62 tons disposed). The Cost Savings was $49,983, or 63%. Loading dock space was a particular problem, with only two dock slots which had to be reserved for the receipt of new materials as well as all outbound shipments. This was the only location from which wastes could be shipped. The large footprint also entailed long carry distances from locations where wastes were generated. The team addressed this problem by mobilizing over 200 wheeled, soft-sided hampers holding 15 to 20 bushels (about 1 cubic yard) of wastes, along with four-wheeled rigid dollies to handle bulky materials like studs and partitions. These were spotted at individual work locations, where employees deposited specific wastes into designated containers. Full hampers or dollies were wheeled and staged in the shipping/receiving area. When wastes accumulated in a quantity to fill a dumpster or rolloff, the appropriate container was brought to the dock, loaded, and removed, taking up dock space only for the short time needed to fill the container. Using the hampers and dollies also made for a very clean work site; because wastes were picked up as they were generated, with none left on the floor for later collection.

MR Credit 1 | Building Life Cycle Impact Reduction

The intent of this credit is to encourage adaptive reuse and optimize the environmental performance of products and materials. This credit can earn up to 5 points.

Four Options

Option 1 historic building reuse can earn 5 points. Option 2 renovation of an abandoned or blighted building can earn 5 points Option 3 building and material reuse can earn 2 to 4 points. Option 4 whole building life cycle assessment can earn 3 points.

Page 143: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

143

This credit is trying to change the way we look at old buildings, so instead of looking at just the bricks and just the mortar of the building as a resource or material, LEED is trying to get us to think of the building as a whole. Projects that use appropriate rehabilitation or restoring buildings in blighted areas can get a good number of points for using the whole building.

Historic Reuse

Let’s look at option 1 first, historic building reuse. The most environmentally friendly building you can build is one that already exists. This strategy extends the lifetime of embodied energy and diverts the resources from landfills. The requirements are to maintain the existing building structure, envelope, and interior nonstructural elements of a historic building or contributing building in a historic district. To qualify, the building or historic district must be listed or eligible for listing in the local, state, or national register of historic places. LEED version 4 gives preference to advanced solutions over old-world techniques such as cross ventilation, even though these would provide equally good energy savings. As a result, designers have struggled with the conflict between the standards of LEED and the demands for historic preservation. The improvements included in the LEED version 4 standard offer points for overcoming this shortfall.

Types of Reuse

There’s more than one way to reuse a building. In fact, when it comes to historic structures, the Secretary of the Interior’s Standards for the Treatment of Historic Properties outlines four historic building treatment approaches, including preservation, restoration, rehabilitation, and reconstruction. While preservation is focused on the stabilization and repair of existing historic properties, restoration involves returning an existing building to its original design concept which often requires the removal of features that were added during periods of time following original construction. Similarly, rehabilitation involves retaining a building’s historic character but changing it to meet new requirements and uses. Reconstruction, on the other hand, requires the re-building of non-surviving buildings (or portions thereof) in order to restore them to wholeness. For this option there is no percent compliance and no minimum area of building reuse. If however the project team does something to the building that causes the building to lose the historic designation, this option can no longer be achieved. In normal circumstances a member of the local historic society and permitting board would work closely to make sure the historic aspects of the building are preserved. The value is retaining the regional vernacular of a neighborhood.

Page 144: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

144

Abandoned or Blighted

Option 2 is for the renovation of an abandoned or blighted building. For this option project teams must maintain at least 50%, by surface area, of the existing building structure, enclosure, and interior structural elements for buildings that meet local criteria of abandoned or are considered blight. The building must be renovated to a state of productive occupancy. Up to 25% of the building surface area may be excluded from credit calculation because of deterioration or damage. The definition of what is abandoned or blighted may be defined by local criteria. LEED considers a property be abandoned “if the rights have been surrendered, relinquished, or ceded voluntarily with no intention of the owner to reclaim it. This includes the title claim in possession of the property. Blighted properly is defined as neglected, rundown or deteriorated, sufficient to constitute a threat to human health, safety, and public welfare.”

Material Reuse

If the building cannot be deemed abandoned or blighted project teams can look at earning Option 3, building and material reuse. Likely the most obvious way to reuse buildings is by retaining the existing structure and renovating it for a new purpose and/or to improve its performance. Different than a purely aesthetic remodeling of a building, a whole building retrofit involves systems thinking, which is used to evaluate the building’s current performance in terms of energy consumption, waste use, and occupant health and productivity, with a view to developing a project plan for widespread upgrades. This type of building reuse may involve any number of aspects, including upgrades to the building envelope, improvements to the heating and cooling systems, retrofitting the structure to encourage natural ventilation and increase daylighting, as well as replacing old fixtures and piping to reduce water consumption. More advanced retrofits may also include installing a green roof or integrating renewable energy systems such as geothermal, solar photovoltaics, or even wind energy. Sometimes a retrofit will also involve converting the structure or interior layout in order to accommodate different activities. This is often the case for derelict buildings in depressed neighborhoods, for instance, for the purpose of breathing new life into abandoned spaces. For low-income communities, this helps to beautify their neighborhoods at a lower cost than constructing new buildings. It also keeps disposal of C&D waste to a minimum which helps relieve stress on local landfills.

Page 145: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

145

Numerous reports show that renovating and upgrading existing buildings has a positive impact on the culture of communities as well. Restoring old buildings infuses a sense of revitalization by turning buildings once considered eyesores into functional spaces. When the buildings are reused for things such as local businesses and community purposes, they stimulate job creation and keep more money circulating within local economies. These benefits in turn reduce poverty, decrease crime rates, and create a sense of cohesion and togetherness, all of which enriches peoples’ lives. For Option 3 Building Material Reuse, reuse or salvage building materials from off site or on site as a percentage of the surface area, as listed in the table. Include structural elements (e.g., floors, roof decking), enclosure materials (e.g., skin, framing), and permanently installed interior elements (e.g., walls, doors, floor coverings, ceiling systems). Exclude from the calculation window assemblies and any hazardous materials that are remediated as a part of the project. The minimum percent of completed project surface area reused is 25%, with increasing increments of 50% and 75%. Points vary between BD&C projects and Core & Shell projects.

Salvage

First consider the building structure and envelope, the roof deck and exterior skin. Window assemblies are not counted. Hazardous materials are also excluded from any of these calculations because you wouldn’t want to keep them and they must be removed anyway. If you have asbestos abatement and that makes you have to demo certain areas, that doesn't hurt you in the calculations. There are a different number of points depending on the type of project and how much of the building is retained. This is one of those credits that a lot of projects can't achieve because the project is for new construction, and you can't retain walls, floors and a roof if you're doing new construction. Then you may ask, “Well, what about salvage items?” Salvage items will fit into this option as well but it’s going to be a lot harder to get to 25% salvaged material on a new construction project where you’re not reusing a building. If you are using less than 25% salvaged materials, you can count their contribution in MR credit BPDO: Raw Materials. In predesign project teams would identify items for reuse, and analyze the cost savings from the building reuse. Look at what you can keep and what should be demolished. During the schematic design the project team can pinpoint how to reuse these materials and as much of the building as possible. Incorporate existing components in plans and specifications. The project teams determine the square footage for existing building reuse for credit compliance.

Page 146: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

146

Calculations

For the calculations, create an itemized spreadsheet listing all of the interior components. Quantify the reuse in terms of square feet. All calculations are based on surface areas of major existing structural and envelope components. Add up the surface area of your walls, floors and the roof altogether. Window assemblies would be excluded, because LEED doesn’t want projects to reuse windows. Newer windows are more energy efficient. Hazardous materials and materials that pose contamination risks are excluded as well, as is any materials that are not structurally sound. If there are walls covered in lead paint, those walls would need to be removed. The area of those walls will not count against the totals.

Sample Question

A major renovation project of an abandoned warehouse will include reusing the building. What project materials are excluded in the calculations for building and material reuse? (Choose 2) A. Interior load-bearing wall B. Second floor window assemblies C. Western facing cement wall that has no windows D. Exterior walls painted with lead paint For Option 3 Building and Material Reuse, maintain the existing building structure, including: -structural floors -roof decking -envelope, excluding window assemblies -permanently installed interior elements (e.g., walls, doors, floor coverings, ceiling systems) The cement wall would be included in the calculations as contributing to the materials reused in the building. What must be excluded are: -window assemblies (Choice B) -hazardous materials such as asbestos -materials that pose a contaminations risk to occupants such as walls with lead paint (Choice D)

Page 147: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

147

Whole Building Lifecycle Assessment

Option 4 is the whole building life-cycle assessment which can earn 3 points. LCA is about looking both at manufacturing and future waste impacts of a building or product. An issue that is quite common with materials such as steel or aluminum is that a large amount of energy goes in to the front end of the process in terms of the extraction. How then, do we understand what the true impact of the material is in the building if you want to reuse the material, and how do you measure that material impact? This is where LCA helps us consider future impacts. Keep in mind, life cycle analysis only provides numbers, but the understanding of those numbers affects your environmental footprint. Properly performed, a life-cycle analysis is a detailed calculation of every phase of a product's manufacturing process and usage over time. Typically, this includes five basic phases: 1. Extraction phase. (Sometimes called the “cradle.”) A true life cycle starts with the extraction phase where the raw materials of the product are identified along with the means of extracting and transporting that material to a manufacturing site such as a factory. 2. Manufacturing phase. This phase is examined in terms of the processes and procedures needed to turn the raw materials into a finished product ready for delivery. Often, it includes electricity and water consumption is volumes greater than the weight of the finished product. (When ready for delivery it is sometimes referred to as being at the “gate”). 3. Construction phase. The third phase is where design and construction professionals usually see the products, specifically when the products are transported from a factory to the jobsite and installed as part of the normal construction process. 4. Use phase. From there the product begins its useful service life or use phase as part of the building to the benefit of the building owner and users. Here, a product like a fan would consume electricity under normal operation. This electricity end use is known as ‘scope 2’ emissions. 5. End of life phase. (Sometimes called the “grave.”) At the end of its usefulness in the building, the product moves to its end of life phase where it needs to be removed and either reclaimed, repurposed, recycled, reused, or disposed of. Assessing the issues and impacts across all five of these phases makes up a full life-cycle assessment (sometimes called a full “cradle to grave” assessment) of a particular product or even a category of products and materials.

Page 148: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

148

The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) has become recognized around the world for establishing LCA standards and rules, and LEED references ISO 14044.

Decision Making

This credit is designed to provide the project team with guidance to lessen the construction impact on the environment. The more information you can get through a whole building life-cycle assessment, the better decisions the project team will make about material selection and re-use. This credit answers the question of how much impact am I avoiding by reusing the building or by optimizing the materials being used? If you are reusing a building you can use options 1, 2, or 3. If you aren’t reusing the building then you are building new, in which case the project is automatically going to need to choose option 4 The idea of this credit is similar to the Energy and Atmosphere credit for optimize energy performance, where project teams take a baseline scenario and then creates a design case to compare against. The savings are calculated against a baseline, so you will get points based on your improvement. Option 4 whole building life-cycle assessment is similar in concept. A project team would create a reference LCA building and compare it against the building design. Using less materials, using better materials, or using different materials will help out with the savings. For this option projects must demonstrate a minimum of 10% reduction compared to the baseline of a building in 3 impact categories, which we will cover next. The scope of the whole building life cycle assessment is the complete building envelope and structural elements, which includes the material components of footings and foundations, structural wall assemblies, floors and ceilings. What’s not in scope are the MEP components, site development, and interior nonstructural components.

Impact Categories

Ok so how is LEED going to define ‘better’ materials and ‘better decisions’? That is where impact categories come in. There are 6 impact categories used for measuring reduction: global warming potential (GHG, greenhouse gases)

depletion of the stratospheric ozone layer

acidification of land and water sources

eutrophication of water

formation of tropospheric ozone and

depletion of nonrenewable energy resources

Page 149: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

149

Projects must demonstrate a minimum of 10% reduction compared to the baseline of a building in global warming potential, and a 10% reduction in at least 2 of these 5 other impact categories. One of the categories must be global warming potential, so you are really only picking two others.

Balance

Designed cannot make improvements in one area at the sacrifice of another. That would be a negative externality of single attribute thinking. In general, LEED promotes the proactive strategy called Triple Bottom Line decision making, or balancing the benefits of all impact categories. Therefore, in life-cycle assessments, no impact category in the design case may increase by more than 5% compared with the baseline building. What that means is for those 6 categories, your building’s design case may not exceed the baseline case by 5% in any category. It’s not enough to just do well in 3 of the categories, you can’t do poorly in the other categories in order to do well in others. Part of the requirements are for the baseline building and the proposed building design must be comparable. This includes the size, function, orientation, and operating energy as defined in EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Performance. You’re not saving energy by comparing a 100,000 square foot (9,290 square meter) 10-story office building to a 20,000 square foot (1,858 square meter) retail building. These different comparison options are different aspects of defining the baseline building, and help isolate the material decisions being made. The baseline and design case of the proposed building use a service life of 60 years for the comparison. You’re looking at these buildings over an extended period of time to get a good comparison.

Components

The whole building LCA is simply thinking of the building as one big product. That means you’re taking all the LCAs of each of the material and considering them together. The whole-building LCA is going to include the building envelope, walls, structures, ceilings, and covered parking. It’s basically the major assemblies of the building and not the interior. Projects can assess the interiors if they choose to but it isn’t required for the credit. No painting, no finishes, etc. The best way to think of it is to take the building, turn it upside down and shake it. All the stuff that falls out doesn’t count. Define the wall, roof, and floor assemblies following the performance requirements of the building envelope as defined in ASHRAE 90.1–2010, Appendix G, Opaque Assemblies,

Page 150: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

150

Vertical Fenestration, Skylights, and Roof Solar Reflectance and Thermal Emittance sections, for the project’s climate zone. Windows count because they are part of the façade. If a project has a curtain wall versus insulated metal panels or brick, all of those things count. The wall insulation counts in this credit. It’s that whole exterior wall structure from the skin to the skin. All of that counts. What doesn’t count are things like dividing walls. The 60 year service life is used as the assumed life of the entire building structure and enclosure. Things like dividing walls may change over the service life so they aren’t included, especially when tenants may come and go and want the walls rearranged. If you wanted to include solar panels, you could but don’t have to. You need to consider the goal of your assessment. Do solar panels have much to do with the building? However, covered parking is on this list because there are a lot of projects that have parking underground or have parking associated with the building. What is excluded are MEP components, elevators, fire detection, excavation, and parking lots.

Scope

For this assessment, the scope will be cradle to grave. You will see in the Environmental Product Declarations credit later the scope is cradle to gate, which is different. For a building LEED is expecting to look at the end-of-life scenario of the building. The cradle-to-grave assessment includes environmental impacts associated with all the life-cycle stages for the building structure and enclosure: resource extraction or harvest, building product manufacture, on-site construction, product maintenance and replacement (where warranted), and deconstruction or demolition and disposal over the assumed 60-year service life.

Process

First you have to select which tool you are going to use for your LCA. The tool you select is going to be based on ability, knowledge, and goals. The first step is to create the baseline. When you are creating the baseline there are some aspects laid out in the credit requirements of what has to be the same – the size, function, orientation, location, and operating energy performance. Some things can be different, like the building’s shape. If you have a square baseline building, you can have a rectangular design case building. The floor areas have to be the same however. It is acceptable to compare a one-story building to a ten-story building if they have the same floor area.

Page 151: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

151

During the process compare the different structural types, assemblies, and variations in products. For example comparing curtain walls vs. brick. You can break up different components of the building and group them together and ask – how much impact is coming from this high level grouping of components? Depending on the project you can decide what makes sense as you look at the components and dig deeper to determine what it means. For example consider the foundation. You might ask where did the foundation come from, which cement did we use and why? What if we used a different cement, and what impact would that have on the LCA model? The last step in the assessment would be taking the baseline results and making design decisions based on the environmental impacts. Again you are aiming for a 10% reduction in global warming potential and two of the five other impact categories, while not exceeding any other category by 5%. This is often the case with LCA projects, where many impacts get reduced but others end up going up.

Example

One of the trends in construction is the use of large timber structural projects. Instead of steel and concrete, timber and large scale laminated timber products are being used. When you look at the LCA of these timber products they look pretty good in terms of reduced carbon impacts, and reduced global warming impacts. Note that if you aren’t using FSC certified timber, you may be negatively impacting habitats.

Timeline

In principle, building information modeling (BIM) ought to provide designers with the detailed bill of materials necessary to perform a Life Cycle Assessment during project delivery. But in practice, elements in BIM models often do not reflect the actual volume of materials, requiring a more refined definition of architectural products than expected. How are you going to do a whole-building LCA quickly? With demand for whole-building LCA increasing, a partnership of architects, LCA experts, and software developers has worked to release Tally—a new tool that allows designers to track environmental impacts in real time while creating models in the popular BIM software Revit. What becomes fascinating is that as you start to make these decisions you can start to ask what is the impact increase if I change the floor area or does this increase in terms of if I had a different dimension to it. Also you can start to play scenarios with the clients where you can say, if I start to look at the energy crisis in the future, what is going to happen to this building performance. What will actually happen if I add more insulation? To save

Page 152: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

152

the client money in the future you can look at the life cycle cost and the life cycle impact, and use this data in a number of scenarios to really understand the building and give the informed view to the client to realize what is going on.

Building Product Disclosure and Optimization Credit Suite

The next set of three credits are freshly organized in LEED v4 to address building product disclosure and optimization (BPDO). Disclosure is knowledge-seeking and means transparency of product supply chains, ingredients, and life-cycle impacts. It’s about building a body of publicly available knowledge. Optimization seeks to reward products that have met thresholds or benchmarks for performance based on impact categories. You’ll find that each of these credits has two options. Option one for each credit is going to address the transparency and disclosure of materials. The second option will address optimization, or the performance part of the material. The disclosure option is really where that transparency mechanism is. What does transparency mean? Well if you look on the side of a box of cereal or a bottle of ketchup, you can see what ingredients are in it. Do you want the ketchup that has high-fructose corn syrup, real sugar, or just tomatoes and salt? You get to read the label and decide. Transparency in materials is giving you the information so you can decide. It doesn’t say what’s better for you – the high fructose corn syrup, the real sugar, or neither, it just tells you so you can pick. LEED also doesn’t give more points or value based on what has been disclosed. It’s just reporting. Disclosure also helps verify claims from labels, such as recycled content, BPA-free, zero-VOC and so forth. LEED uses different transparency standards for each disclosure option, depending on what the goal of that particular credit is. Then LEED takes it a step further to say, “What would the performance metric be to demonstrate optimization for the product?” That’s an additional point for using products that are really going to have a better health impact. Any new concept introduced to an existing industry will take time to become fully integrated. There is potential for fear that these next few credits are too complex and too big of a jump from previous reporting metrics. It’s not impossible, it’s just new. These BPDO materials credits, which include EPDs and HPDs, are going to take a while for everyone to get educated and the market to catch up. But in order to continue to transform the industry, the USGBC and its membership approved these additions to LEED v4.

Page 153: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

153

BPDO Scope and Details

The scope of all three Building Optimization and Disclosure credits includes permanently installed building products and excludes active mechanical, plumbing, electrical and specialty equipment. However, passive MEP such as piping, wiring, ductwork and mechanical insulation are included in the scope of the credits. Similar products from the same manufacturer can be counted as separate products if they have distinct formulations, but not if they are aesthetic variations or reconfigurations. Option 1 of each credit rewards teams for selecting a number of products that disclose environmental attributes. The idea is to increase manufacturer participation in transparency. It rewards producers who voluntarily disclose their process and ingredients. Those may seem like reasonable benchmarks, but until very recently, it was not common. This is a new metric in LEED, and each credit has different weightings for a product depending on the stringency of the transparency program. Option 2 of each credit seeks products that exhibit superior characteristics. Products may be double-counted across these three credits and the options within the credit. Option 2 is calculated by cost, which may be a more familiar metric for project teams who have used previous versions of LEED. For each credit, structure and enclosure materials may not constitute more than 30 percent of the total value of compliant building. Once that 30 percent cap is reached, the value of the structure and enclosure materials cannot count toward the cost of the compliant products, but their value must still be included in the total product costs. This encourages demand for sustainability of less expensive materials or those where large environmental gains have not yet been made. For BD+C projects only, teams may also use a default value of 45 percent of total construction costs for their total materials cost. Look for products that cover multiple credit criteria to help increase the likelihood of earning these credits. A single product, with full disclosure and optimized performance, can contribute up to six points in the MR section. All three of these credits are best approached early on during the design phase so that product research can help the team capitalize on these opportunities for credit synergies. At this point, it may be appropriate to use industry-wide and generic information to make high-level decisions, such as the decision between steel and concrete. Later on, manufacturer-specific information is desirable so that more granularities can be considered—such as the decision between nylon carpet and polyester carpet—and ultimately the decision among vendors that can provide alternatives.

Page 154: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

154

Terminology

It’s worth reviewing a few popular transparency and disclosure tools that can be utilized to meet the new credits. Some, like LCA, we have already covered. Others will be covered in more depth as we go on. LCA is a technique used to measure product or building environmental impacts, such as carbon footprint, throughout its life cycle. Typically, an LCA measures impacts from raw material extraction, transportation, manufacturing, use and end of life. The LCA is the backbone of an environmental product declaration (EPD). Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs) – are a comprehensive disclosure of a product’s impacts throughout its life cycle. EPDs are also known as Type 3 Eco Labels. Like LCAs and PCRs, EPDs follow the International Organization of Standards guidelines. They are used globally. Product Category Rules (PCR) – are like a recipe for producing an LCA and EPD. They establish the methodology which all product manufacturers in a category must follow when creating an EPD. PCRs follow the International Organization of Standards guidelines. They are used globally. Health Product Declarations (HPDs) - are a standard format for transparent disclosure of building product ingredients and associated hazards. HPDs were created by the Health Product Declaration Collaborative and are mainly used in North America. Global Reporting Initiative (GRI) – is a standard framework for reporting corporate social responsibility information. To meet LEED v4 requirements, manufacturers must report on raw materials sourcing practices.

MR Credit 2 | BPDO - Environmental Product Declarations

The first credit is Materials & Resources credit Building Product Disclosure and Optimization - Environmental Product Declarations. The intent of this credit is to encourage the use of products and materials for which life-cycle information is available and that have environmentally, economically, and socially preferable life-cycle impacts. Also, to reward project teams for selecting products from manufacturers who have verified improved environmental life-cycle impacts. In the effort to increase the transparency of product content, Environmental Product Declarations are gaining momentum. EPDs identify the ingredients (feedstock) in a manufactured product. It is a way to communicate in a brief compact form.

Page 155: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

155

EPDs are most often linked to the concept of a nutrition label. An EPD addresses the needs of both manufacturers and buyers seeking clear, credible and precise information about the environmental impacts of a product family. In the commercial building construction field, EPDs simplify the process of making informed direct comparisons of similar products. Keep in mind, an EPD is a statement of fact. It does not judge whether a product meets any particular environmental quality standard. Instead, users are responsible for making judgments about how the information presented impacts their project.

Two Options

Option 1 Environmental product declaration (EPD) can earn on point. And/or Option 2 Multi-attribute optimization can earn one point.

Product Category Rule

In order to declare the environmental impact of a product, whether it be concrete, carpet, or a roof membrane, we need consistent parameters. This need created product category rules. The idea is that the industry accept rules for any particular type of product; flooring rules may be different from the rules for ceiling fans or the rules for looking at a whole building. EPDs are based on Product Category Rules. PCRs specifically define what information is to be reported in an Environmental Product Declaration so that it can accurately reflect a product’s environmental impact Product Category Rule documents define the requirements for EPDs of a certain product category. They are vital for the concept of environmental declarations as they enable transparency and comparability between different EPDs based on the same PCR. The PCR is the standardized method for conducting and reporting the results of a life-cycle assessment for a particular group (category) of products. The PCR ensures that all products in its defined category (e.g. concrete products, flooring products, etc.) are measured the same. It also assures that their environmental impacts are quantified in the same way so comparisons can be readily made between different manufactured products within the same category. The PCR defines the means for measuring and reporting out by requiring that the same functional unit of measurement is used for all products within a category (e.g. impact per cubic yard of concrete, or per 100 square yards of a flooring, etc.).

Page 156: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

156

PCRs are developed using a consensus-based, collaborative, and fairly transparent process by industry experts and stakeholders, following certain ISO guidelines. They are then verified by an expert review panel. To put it all together, the LCA is based on the product category rules. When you combine the rules with the assessment, you put together the EPD, as required for this credit. Note that as a project team member, you aren’t doing any of this development, but it’s helpful to understand the process so that when you put two or more EPDs side by side, you have an idea of where they came from. As a project team member, you’re just collecting EPDs from manufacturers. The challenge is to work with suppliers who can provide EPDs; some may not be on board yet.

Related Documents

The EPD summarizes the LCA in a more meaningful form which can be interpreted by the average reader. It takes the technical information of a complex LCA, and creates what amounts to a nutrition label for products.

Requirements

Option 1 requires using at least 20 different permanently installed products sourced from at least five different manufacturers with an EPD. There are 3 types of EPDs, and each is weighted differently by LEED. There is an LCA that’s done by a manufacturer without a product category rule and without a third party review that accounts for a quarter of a full product. You would need four times as many of this weaker document to meet the credit requirement for 20 products. A stronger EPD is a generic product done by an association – let’s say it’s for floor tile – counts as a half of a product. Teams would have to collect 40 of these to meet credit requirements. The strongest EPD is created by a particular manufacturer, for a unique product, and counts as a whole product relative to the credit on EPDs. A Type III EPD is based on ISO Standards that use a life- cycle approach for evaluation. This means that potential impacts to the environment are indicated for different phases of a product’s life: Sourcing/ Extraction, Manufacturing, Installation, Use, and End of Life. There are two classifications of Type III EPDs: Industry Wide EPDs, which are generic to a product type, and Product Specific Declarations, which are manufacturer-specific for a family of products.

Page 157: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

157

Product Specific-Type I EPD

The first type is a lifecycle assessment disclosure is derived directly from the manufacturer for a specific product. This is for cases when there is no product category rule, the product category rule is not relevant, or the manufacturer doesn’t have the resources to produce a full EPD. For these products you can earn ¼ of a product. The threshold for the credit is 20 different products, so this would count as one-quarter of one product. These are products with a publicly available, critically reviewed life-cycle assessment conforming to ISO 14044 that have at least a cradle to gate scope. What’s a critical reviewer? It’s defined by ISO as to who it can and cannot be.

Industry-Wide – Type II EPD

The next type is an industry-wide (generic) EPD. In the marketplace a bunch of manufacturers will get together and will produce an EPD for their industry. If the manufacturer is recognized as a participant in the program the product is valued as ½ of a product. Usually an industry association will produce an EPD for an entire industry. An example might be gypsum board. Any manufacturer of gypsum board that participates in the industry EPD would have their product count. That will get you half credit because it’s relevant to a product category or a product type, but it’s not product-specific.

Third Party Verified - Type III EPD

A product-specific type 3 EPD has the most value, and counts as one whole product toward the 20 minimum. The EPD is a document created by a manufacturer to show the results of the life-cycle assessment performed on its products in accordance with ISO standards. Where appropriate, the relevant Product Category Rule should be used to conduct the LCA and the completed Environmental Product Declaration should reflect that. Before being published, the EPD needs to be verified and approved by an independent entity such as UL Environment (ULE). The fully vetted EPDs thus enable everyone involved to make accurate direct comparisons of the environmental strengths and weaknesses of similar products, thus providing a degree of transparency in terms of the environmental impacts of using different building products. Many in the green products industry regard the EPD to be a standardized tool used to communicate the environmental performance of a product. It works in the same way that a nutrition label on a food product informs us about the fat, sugar, and cholesterol in the foods we eat. Only in this case, it is an environmental impact

Page 158: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

158

label informing us about energy, pollution, and resource depletion contained in the products that we select and specify.

Twenty Products

Quarter points, half points, full points, 20 products, five manufacturers. That sounds confusing. You are trying to get to 20 total products, but depending on which type of EPD is available, the product may only provide partial credit. Let’s say your project uses all products from manufacturers that have created their own product specific EPD. You need 80 products since they are all valued at one-fourth of a product. If you use 20 products that all have a type-3 EPD, you just need the 20 products. You can also use any combination to get to the 20 total. The important thing to recognize about Option 1 is it says nothing about how good the results are in the EPD, unlike for Option 2 where the products actually demonstrate an impact reduction. An EPD just informs you. They provide data from which the manufacturer will hopefully in the future try to improve on. You as a buyer can take two EPDs and compare products. The idea is by having to put out an EPD, a manufacturer is going to have incentive to make their products and materials better than their competitors, which will help transform the industry.

Option 2 Multi-attribute Optimization

As manufacturers, if you can show your product’s life cycle environmental impacts are less than your industry LCA in at least three of the impact categories, you can contribute to earning points within this credit. Currently there are many industry associations that have published or are in process of publishing LCA data so these comparisons can soon be completed. To earn this credit project teams must use products with reduced life-cycle environmental impacts for 50% by cost of the products installed. Products that are extracted, manufactured and purchased within 100 miles (160 km) of the project site are valued at 200% of their cost. So you can double it. Impact categories for measuring reduction Resource depletion - the consumption of non-renewable resources including

those used for energy (oil, gas, coal, metals, etc.)

Acidification potential- the potential for the product to contribute to acid rain

Eutrophication potential - the product's contribution to water or soil nutrients that cause algal blooms

Global warming potential - the emissions of carbon dioxide or methane that affect the earth's atmosphere

Ozone layer depletion potential -the reduction in beneficial environmental ozone caused by chlorofluorocarbon emissions

Page 159: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

159

Photochemical ozone creation potential - the contributions to smog caused by hydrocarbon emissions

It is important to recognize that all of the parts of the process as discussed above are inherently tied together. PCRs for a specific product type or category are developed following the guidelines authored by ISO. An LCA is then performed by an independent entity for a specific product or material according to the PCR and the specific minimum impact categories that indicate what must be measured and accounted for. The results of the LCA are then used to publish an EPD that comes from the manufacturer. When architects, engineers, or others request this EPD, then, it is a representation that the proper process has been followed to produce it. It is the EPD that ultimately is used by the design team to assess different products and materials for sustainability and to provide documentation for green building certification programs.

MR Credits 3 | BPDO - Sourcing of Raw Materials

Materials & Resources credit Building Product Disclosure and Optimization –Sourcing of Raw Materials. The intent of this credit is to encourage the use of products and materials for which life cycle information is available and that have environmentally, economically, and socially preferable life cycle impacts. Also, to reward project teams for selecting products verified to have been extracted or sourced in a responsible manner. Rather than focusing on a single attribute, this credit rewards multi-attribute products to push products towards better performance.

Two Options

Option 1 Raw Materials and Extraction Reporting can earn one point. And/or Option 2 Leadership Extraction Practices can earn one point.

Corporate Sustainability

Option 1 focuses on corporate sustainability, and having a published report is a well-established voluntary system that is common among large corporations. The reporting component of this option rewards the use of at least 20 permanently installed building products from manufacturers that have made information available, such as supplier locations, commitment to long-term ecologically responsible land use, reducing environmental harms and meeting applicable responsible sourcing programs. Similar to EPDs, p roject teams receive credit depending on the type of report the manufacturer provides. For example, a third-party- verified corporate sustainability report is valued higher than a disclosure report that is not verified.

Page 160: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

160

For this option you are looking for five different manufacturers that have publicly released a report on their raw materials and their raw materials suppliers as well as a long-term commitment to good land-use and a commitment to reducing carbon from emissions and in their manufacturing process. Here LEED is not only tracking the product contents, but how that product is made and the companies they are coming from. What policies do the companies have in place and if they are a responsible manufacturer.

Global Reporting Initiative

Existing reporting frameworks that contribute toward this credit are used by many Fortune 500 companies and include the Global Reporting Initiative (GRI) Sustainability Report, the Organization for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD) Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises, the U.N. Global Compact Communication of Progress, and ISO 26000: 2010 Guidance on Social Responsibility. The GRI is the most common framework. In practice what this means is that manufacturers are going to have to incorporate CSRs from their raw material suppliers in order to make sure that the impacts of the specific products are now included in the corporate sustainability report.

Leadership Extraction Practices

Option 2: Leadership Extraction Practices rewards the use of products (25 percent of total products, by cost) that come from an extraction process showing leadership in minimizing environmental impact. This option references FSC certification, materials reuse, and recycled content without notable changes from past versions of LEED. The biggest change is in bio-based materials: the credit newly requires Rainforest Alliance certification under the umbrella of the Sustainable Agriculture Network (SAN) to certify bio-based materials that may not fall under the wood or bamboo category, such as cotton, wool, straw, soy, or corn-based polymers. The SAN standard ensures that crops are responsibly sourced according to ten categories, including everything from wildlife protection to occupational health. Additionally, reuse and materials with recycled content contribute toward achievement of this credit, as the credit intent is met by avoiding extraction and the use of virgin materials altogether through the use of recycled feedstock.

Page 161: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

161

Extended Producer Responsibility

Extended producer responsibility or EPR, is better known as a take-back program. EPR means that a manufacturer has established measures to reclaim its products at the end of their useful life and to recycle them into the same product in a “closed loop.” It has become common to see building products advertised as “recyclable,” but some manufacturers have stretched that term to the limit, using it as a label for new product lines for which established, closed-loop recycling processes haven’t made it out of research and development. LEED v4 requires compliant EPR products to have established programs that include program literature and contact information. Products meeting this criteria are valued at 50% of their cost. Projects should have more luck finding products that meet EPR criteria. More than half of the states in the U.S. have some laws requiring EPR for certain categories—often for products with concentrated toxic content like cell phones and fluorescent lamps. For building projects, carpeting is the most commonly applicable area that might amount to significant dollar value. Carpet companies have worked to establish ways to take back the large, uniform quantities of product that are discarded, with some carpet companies taking back any kind of carpet and recycling it into backing, for example. There is more carpeting in U.S. landfills than almost any other product, and most of it is toxic, according to the Center for Health, Environment and Justice. Interface, one of the world’s largest carpet manufacturers and a pioneer in sustainable business, anticipates eliminating PVC from its entire product line by 2020.

Certified Wood

Wood products must be certified by FSC or USGBC-approved equivalent. These products are valued at 100% of their cost. Why FSC? The Forest Stewardship Council is a great role model of abiding by the triple bottom line. Forest management certification is awarded to responsible forest managers after their operations successfully complete audits of forestry practices and plans. Chain-of-custody (COC) certification is awarded to companies that process, manufacture, and/or sell products made of certified wood and who successfully complete audits to ensure proper use of the FSC name and logo. The use of certified wood, like most of your building materials, should be selected in the design phase. It may take longer to order and to find suppliers. Additionally you can't count on meeting the credit percentages unless you know if you can even get certified wood for your project.

Page 162: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

162

Certified wood is the same material as other wood, it was just cut down responsibly. The wood can be used anywhere non-certified wood is used: structural framing

general dimensional framing

flooring

sub-flooring

wood doors

finishes

Understand the chain of custody requirements. Basically everybody that touches a product needs to be a part of this chain of custody, except for the end user. This includes the transport company taking the wood from the forest all the way to the vendor that sells the wood. All these different people contribute to this chain of custody, and each of them have chain of custody certification numbers that you would log as part of this credit. Collect all vendor invoices for all permanently installed wood on the project. Vendor invoices must have the vendor CoC number. All vendor invoices must be collected from the project contractors and subcontractors for permanently installed wood products, whether the wood is FSC certified or not. Vendors are defined as those companies that sell products to the project contractor or subcontractor. The invoices are how you compute this credit. CoC documentation is required for transport, suppliers and manufacturers, and vendors. The project contractors and subcontractors (the end users) are not required to have CoC certification. The vendors CoC certificate number would be included on any invoice that includes FSC wood products.

Bio-Based

Bio-based materials are valued at 100% of their cost. Bio-based products must meet the Sustainable Agriculture Network’s Rainforest Alliance Standard. What SAN does is certify bio-based materials that many not fall under the old wood or bamboo categories, including cotton, wool, straw, soy, or corn-based polymers. What are examples of bio-based materials? Things like bamboo, cotton, linoleum, sunflower, wool, soy, and cork are bio-based. Brick, stone, cement, are not. If it grows from the earth, it’s probably bio-based. If it’s mined in the earth, it’s probably not.

Recycled Content

Recycled content must meet the definition set by ISO 14021-1999 for environmental labels and declarations. Recycled content is the sum of postconsumer recycled content plus one-half the pre-consumer recycled content, based on cost. Products meeting

Page 163: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

163

recycled content criteria are valued at 100% of their cost for the purposes of credit achievement calculation. Knowing what is entailed in the content is very important for these calculations. Post-consumer is if you have a plastic soda bottle, recycle the bottle, and the plastic ends up in carpet. If it's pre-consumer, which is also known as post-industrial, that might be where a lumber mill takes some sawdust generated from cutting lumber, applies a binding agent to the sawdust and turns it into particle board. The sawdust is a material that never made it to a consumer prior to being turned into another product. LEED is essentially saying postconsumer recycled materials are harder to get because consumers are less likely to recycle than a company in which there’s more profit involved. That’s why LEED counts only half of the pre-consumer and all of the postconsumer recycled content.

Materials Reuse

Reuse includes salvaged, refurbished, or reused products. Products meeting materials reuse criteria are valued at 100% of their cost for the purposes of credit achievement calculation. Some common reused materials are Beams and posts

Flooring

Paneling

Doors and frames

Cabinetry and furniture

Bricks

Projects can reuse both fixed and finish materials for this credit. Determine the preservation cost, life-cycles, and project timeline when selecting materials. When you are selecting products, you are again looking to the manufacturer to supply you with the information you need to make an informed choice. In your design process start thinking early on about what type of materials you want to include in the project. For materials reuse, it’s much easier to reuse materials found on site unless you're going to a salvage yard, buying a product, drawing it into the drawings, and having the salvage yard store it. A salvage yard is never going to say, “Oh, yes, we’re going to have that in 6 months.” They don't know, and it could get sold. To use salvage items, you have to

Page 164: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

164

procure them early or at least be guaranteed that you're going to get them. Otherwise, you draw them in to the plans and then they disappear because somebody else bought them.

MR Credit 4 | BPDO - Material Ingredients

The occupants of the average office building may have no idea what makes up the building products that surround them every day, and often, the project teams that specified them know just as little - unless that information is voluntarily made available by the manufacturer. This credit aims to support manufacturers that disclose information about the ingredients in their products, allowing project teams to make more informed decisions. Products can contribute to one point by declaring all ingredients more than 0.1 percent by weight, and another point if companies can prove that they are avoiding some of the most hazardous chemicals as determined by several governmental lists. This credit is rewarding manufacturers based on their material ingredients.

Three Options

Option 1 Material Ingredient Reporting can earn one point. Option 2 Material Ingredient Optimization can earn one point Option 3 Product Manufacturer Supply Chain Optimization can earn one point.

Transparency

Option 1 is again transparency. Material Ingredient Reporting is based on using at least 20 permanently installed products that provide a chemical inventory through one of a variety of third-party programs, such as a Health Product Declaration, a Manufacturer’s Inventory that must meet a number of criteria, or Cradle to Cradle v2 Silver certification. This will require manufacturers to have documentation on the whole product preparation and to use a standard program to inventory the name, chemicals, attributes, structures, and number of ingredients in the product. The manufacturer inventory involves publishing Chemical Abstract Service Registration Numbers (CASRN) for all ingredients in the product; some ingredients may be kept proprietary, but their hazard potential based on the GreenScreen benchmarking system must be disclosed. This inventory is very similar to the Health Product Declaration program.

Page 165: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

165

Corporations such as Google, and dozens of architecture firms have banded together to create the Health Product Declaration, a hazard-based standard format for reporting ingredients and health warnings, which is recognized by LEED v4. Health Product Declarations are a big topic, but they are essentially a standardized format for manufacturer’s to disclose ingredients and hazards. An HPD has two parts, an inventory of ingredients and an assessment. The HPD reviews the ingredients against an authoritative list. HPDs build on and incorporate the data from the EPD but goes on to combine it with trustworthy and verifiable measures of ingredients that impact ecotoxicity and human toxicity. As such, it creates a disclosure document that truthfully indicates the toxicity impact of a product on the people who live with it, and the natural environment that it exists within. As envisioned, the HPD will create a single standard that can be used to create an apples-to-apples comparison of products based on their ingredients. Cradle-to-cradle has been around for some time. The difference is cradle-to-cradle products are assessed and optimized against health criteria. What they assess is fully disclosed so you understand what each level of cradle-to-cradle certification actually means in regards to the product. Really manufacturers have two options for this credit. With an HPD, you’re going to disclose everything that’s in your product. For cradle-to-cradle, a third-party assessor is going to have that information and provide it for those of us that are using the certification. With cradle-to-cradle in order to get certified, the manufacturer does not have to publically disclose their ingredients or secret sauce. The disclosure is instead done to the certification program and its certifiers and auditors. To qualify for LEED, however, the HPD must include all ingredients down to 0.1% (1,000 ppm) and full disclosure of health hazards from ingredients, based on the GreenScreen assessment criteria. Companies can choose to leave some proprietary ingredients unnamed as long as they still report health hazards for those chemicals. An HPD is several pages long; the summary page on front indicates the level of disclosure and checkboxes for the manufacturer to indicate “Full Disclosure of Known Hazards” for every ingredient.

HPD vs. EPD

The HPD is a format for reporting product contents and health information about products and materials. An HPD informs users how the product affects their body. EPDs are a standardized way of quantifying the environmental impact of a product or system, including raw material acquisition, energy use and efficiency, emissions to air, soil and water and waste generation. HPDs are complementary to EPDs. Think of the difference

Page 166: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

166

between how the manufacturing of a ceiling tile affects air and water (EPD), versus how the VOC content and emissions from that ceiling tile affect your lungs and skin.

Material Ingredient Optimization

Option 2: Material Ingredient Optimization involves using at least 25 percent by cost of products that have assessed and optimized their material ingredients against pre-approved USGBC programs such as GreenScreen v1.2 Benchmark, Cradle to Cradle v2 Gold or Platinum Certification. Remember in Option 1 is just revealing what the ingredients are, good or bad. Option 2 you get credit for optimization, and looking for ingredients that meet certain standards. For international projects you can also work with the European Union REACH list, which is methodically identifying and screening thousands of chemicals that are in commerce. They are identifying certain ones as being on what’s called an authorization list, which means that companies have to get special authorization to use them.

Product Manufacturer Supply Chain Optimization

Option 3 Product Manufacturer Supply Chain Optimization. Use new building products for at least 25% at cost of the total value of the permanently installed fixtures that are sourced from manufacturers that engage in validated and robust safety, health hazard and risk programs, which at a minimum document at least 99% by weight the ingredients used to make the material or product. Many companies don’t know what is in their supply chain when they are selling someone else’s component as part of their product. An example might be a wooden door where the door supplier is using hinges and doorknobs from some other company. Manufacturers get to learn about their products and they may discover there is something in them that they don’t like, and they find an opportunity for change.

Local Materials

One final point for these 3 credits. In each of them, locally sourced building materials are recognized as a multiplier for optimization. In the past there was a 500 mile radius for regional materials, now v4 only recognizes a 100 mile (160 km) local radius. First you have to meet the sustainability criteria, for example FSC wood, then if the product is extracted, manufactured, and purchased within 100 miles (160 km) it counts as double towards the cost in the credit calculation.

Page 167: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

167

Comprehensive Strategy

Now that we have looked at those three material credits, it is important to note that the disclosure for a product does not take place of the typical performance achievement type labels. Disclosure and optimization is actually meant to work together. In reality, you have transparency in production and transparency in performance working together to complete the picture. Because what you want to know is that it is a good performing product, and you also want to know what is in the product. That is why these strategies have so much in common, because they both work together very well - they are not meant to replace each other. Likewise LCA doesn’t do everything - it can tell you what your product effects, but it doesn’t tell you what kind of forest that wood came from. It can also tell you how many substances are in your product, but not necessarily how good or bad those substances are for your body. So remember that when you are picking materials, its disclosure and optimization, not one or the other. Taken together is where the best choices are made for your project. Transparency by itself is not going to tell you if it is a good product.

Rating System Adaptations

Healthcare projects have an additional prerequisite and several additional credits. MR Prerequisite PBT Source Reduction – Mercury MR Credit PBT Source Reduction – Mercury MR Credit PBT Source Reduction – lead, cadmium, and copper MR Credit Furniture and Medical Furnishings MR Credit Design for Flexibility

PBT is a generic identifier for any chemical that is a persistent bio-accumulative toxin.

MR Healthcare Prerequisite | PBT Source Reduction - Mercury

The intent is to reduce mercury-containing products, devices, and mercury release through product substitution, capture, and recycling. This is going to be an extension of the building’s recycling program. As part of the project’s recycling collection system, identify the following: types of mercury-containing products and devices to be collected

criteria governing how they are to be handled by a recycling program

disposal methods for captured mercury

Here you are basically trying to minimize the quantity of mercury contained in lamps. The types of lamps and each of their maximum contents are listed in the reference guide.

Page 168: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

168

MR Healthcare Credit | PBT Source Reduction – Mercury

The prerequisite also has a corresponding credit which requires specifying and installing fluorescent lamps with both low mercury content and long lamp life. The many different lamp types, maximum mercury content, and lamp life are defined in the requirements. This adds onto the prerequisite not by changing the mercury content of the specific lamps, but by specifying a minimum lamp life.

MR Healthcare Credit | PBT Source Reduction – Lead, Cadmium, and Copper

The intent of this credit is to reduce the release of PBTs associated with the life cycle of building materials. For lead, address your fittings and soldering. Roofing and flashing must be lead free, as well as all paints. Electrical wire has to have a minimum amount of lead as well. For cadmium, specify no use of interior or exterior paints containing intentionally added cadmium. Greeneal certified paint is required to contain no cadmium. For copper pipe applications, reduce or eliminate joint-related sources of copper corrosion.

MR Healthcare Credit | Furniture and Medical Furnishings

The intent of this credit is to enhance the environmental and human health performance attributes associated with freestanding furniture and medical furnishings. Use at least 30% (1 point) or 40% (2 points), by cost, of all freestanding furniture and medical furnishings (e.g., mattresses, foams, panel fabrics, cubicle curtains, window coverings, other textiles) that meet the criteria in one of the following three options. Option 1 Minimal chemical content Option 2 Testing and modeling of chemical content Option 3 Multi-attribute assessment of products

Option 1 | Minimum Chemical Content

Option one is the minimum chemical content. It requires all components that constitute at least 5% by weight of a furniture and medical furnishing containing less than 100 points per million of at least four of the five chemical groups specified:

Page 169: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

169

Formaldehyde heavy metals Chromium in plated finishes Stain and nonstick treatments derived from prefluorinated compounds Added antimicrobial treatments

Option 2

Option 2 requires all components of a furniture or medical furnishing assembly, including textiles, finishes, and dyes, must contain less than 100 parts per million (ppm) of at least two of the five chemicals or materials listed in Option 1. New furniture or medical furnishing assemblies must be in accordance with the ANSI/BIFMA standards, and you have to model the test results using the open plan, private office, or seating scenario in ANSI/BIFMA M7.1. Therefore, computer modeling is required for this option.

Option 3

Option 3 requires using products that meet at least one of the defined criteria. Each product can receive credit for each criterion met. The scope of any environmental product declaration (EPD) must be at least cradle to gate. Product self-declaration covering at least cradle to gate scope EPDs Materials reuse Recycled content Take back program Bio-based materials Certified wood

For any of these options the credit compliance is based on percent of total cost – either 30% or 40%. To hit that goal make sure your project team is selecting products early on in the design to make sure the products are compliant.

MR Healthcare Credit | Design for Flexibility

The intent of this credit is to conserve resources associated with the construction and management of buildings by designing for flexibility and ease of future adaptation and for the service life of components and assemblies.

Page 170: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

170

Implement 3 of the following strategies to earn this credit: Using interstitial space. Interstitial space is an intermediate space located

between regular-use floors, commonly located in hospitals and laboratory-type buildings to allow space for the mechanical systems of the building. By providing this space, laboratory and hospital rooms may be easily rearranged throughout their lifecycles and therefore reduce lifecycle cost.

Provide program soft space. Soft space is an area whose functions can be easily changed. For example, hospital administrative offices could be moved so that this soft space could be converted to a laboratory. In contrast, a lab with specialized equipment and infrastructure would be difficult to relocate.

Providing a soft shell space. Shell spaces are areas designed to be fitted out for future expansion. Shell space is enclosed by the building envelope but otherwise left unfinished.

Identifying horizontal expansion capacity for diagnostic and treatment or other clinical space.

Designating space for future above-ground parking structures,

Using demountable partitions

Use movable or module casework

Page 171: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

171

Key Terms

Performance-Based Single Attributes Transparency Disclosure Hazardous Waste Waste Stream Audit (Retail) Diversion Waste Reduction Source Reduction Waste-To-Energy Historic Abandoned Blighted Component Assembly Lca Cradle Grave Impact Categories Optimization Voc Bpa Passive Mep Environmental Product Declarations (Epds Product Category Rules (Pcr) Health Product Declarations (Hpds) Global Reporting Initiative (Gri) Product Category Rule (Pcr) Corporate Sustainability Report (Csr) Biobased Extended Producer Responsibility (Epr) Closed Loop Greenscreen Local Persistent Bioaccumulative And Toxic (Pbts)

Page 172: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

172

Chapter 8 – Indoor Environmental Quality

Overview

When you look at these credits, look for ones that connect. If you think back to energy and atmosphere for instance, fundamental refrigerant management and enhanced refrigerant management are two that you can study together just like fundamental commissioning and enhanced commissioning. In this category there are also a few you should study together. For instance minimum indoor air quality performance should be studied with Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies. Daylight and views are very different and it’s very easy to confuse them but study them together so you understand how they overlap and how they differ. Acoustical performance will go with the prerequisite for Minimum Acoustical Performance for School projects.

Scorecard

The Indoor Environmental Quality credit category has 2 prerequisites and 9 credits. The credits and prerequisites are: IEQ Prerequisite 1: Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance

IEQ Prerequisite 2: Environmental Tobacco Smoke Control

IEQ Credit 1: Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies

IEQ Credit 2: Low-emitting materials

IEQ Credit 3: Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan

IEQ Credit 4: Indoor Air Quality Assessment

IEQ Credit 5: Thermal Comfort

IEQ Credit 6: Interior Lighting

IEQ Credit 7: Daylight

IEQ Credit 8: Quality Views

IEQ Credit 9: Acoustic Performance

IEQ Prerequisite 1 | Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance

The intent is to contribute to the comfort and well-being of building occupants by establishing minimum standards for indoor air quality (IAQ).

Page 173: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

173

Reference Standards

ASHRAE 62.1 is the key here. Like any ASHRAE standard, it’s a little bit challenging to read the standard yourself and understand it-leave that to the mechanical engineers. The main point here is that ASHRAE 62.1 identifies minimum ventilation rates for the IEQ prerequisite baseline, whereas ASHRAE 90.1 identifies minimum construction specifications for the EA prerequisite baseline. If the local code is more stringent, follow the local code. For Core & Shell any ventilation systems installed must meet the future ventilation needs of tenants. The thinking behind that is considering the base building and being able to expand and provide outside air quality once tenants move in. Install the ductwork and registers within the tenant spaces with growth in mind. In addition, naturally ventilated spaces must comply with ASHRAE 62.1. There is also a helpful flow diagram project teams can use to verify that natural ventilation is appropriate for their design. Project teams must reference the Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE) Applications Manual AM10 to confirm minimum outdoor air opening and space configuration requirements. Projects outside the U.S. may instead meet the minimum outdoor air requirements of Annex B of Comité Européen de Normalisation (CEN) Standard EN 15251–2007, Indoor environmental input parameters for design and assessment of energy performance of buildings addressing indoor air quality, thermal environment, lighting and acoustics; and meet the requirements of CEN Standard EN 13779–2007Ventilation for nonresidential buildings.

Requirements

The requirements are very clear that the teams must meet certain standards. The strategies focus on achieving those standards. The climate and local outdoor air quality will help determine what type of ventilation is appropriate for the project. An area with high outdoor air pollution may not want to choose natural ventilation if the air is going to require a lot of filtering. Determine what type of ventilation your project will use: Active ventilation is for buildings that use mechanical ventilation

Passive ventilation is for buildings that use natural ventilation

Mixed-mode means a combination of mechanical and natural ventilation

Teams must review the ASHRAE standard and ensure their projects meet or exceed the standard.

Page 174: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

174

In pursuit of this prerequisite, teams must balance the needs of IAQ performance with the demand for energy that certain systems use. The ideal is a system that meets the requirements, but does not waste energy. This is a big tradeoff that you're going to hear mentioned a few times. It’s a classic tradeoff in green building where someone says, “What would you rather have, a more energy efficient building or one with better indoor air quality?” And you say, “Well, I want both.” The struggle with having both is if you're bringing in a lot of outside air, generally it’s hot or cold out, and you need to temper that air. You need to either raise or lower the temperature of the air coming in. This takes energy. To bring in a lot of outside air generally requires using more energy - there is the tradeoff.

Calculations

Key for the calculations is using the ventilation rate procedure in the ASHRAE 62.1 guide. The calculations are performed for the worst case scenario which is usually when the supply air flow is at its lowest and the supply air temperature is highest for the critical zone-highest density of people. To determine the ventilation strategy, each room and space must be identified with net occupiable space, type of occupancy, and the design case occupancy. For prerequisite compliance, document ventilation rates per the Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance Calculator for projects with single-zone or 100% outside air HVAC systems. The calculator includes assumptions for occupancy categories from ASHRAE 62.1-2010. Upload the completed calculator to LEED Online. The mechanical design engineer is the responsible party to complete this documentation. The calculations should be performed concurrently with the overall system design. Historically, buildings were often over-ventilated and wasting energy pumping unnecessary fresh air into indoor spaces. The ASHRAE standard actually helps designers specify efficient systems by providing target rates for outdoor air intake. The reference guide supplies detailed guidance on these calculations and advises project teams to revise mechanical system design to meet the outdoor air requirements.

Airflow Monitoring

For both naturally and mechanically ventilated spaces, airflow monitoring is required. This step ensures that your ventilation system is taking in appropriate volumes of fresh outdoor air to mix with recirculated air. For mechanically ventilated spaces, the key numbers are measuring for an accuracy of plus or minus 10%, and sounding an alarm upon a variation of 15% or more. You’re monitoring the minimum outdoor air intake flow with an accuracy of plus or minus 10% of the design minimum outdoor airflow rate.

Page 175: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

175

If your systems doesn’t take in enough outside air, it could have negative health effects. If it takes in more outside air than needed, it could have excessive energy use. Indoor air quality procedures are defined by ASHRAE. LEED distinguishes between variable air volume systems and constant volume systems. When you talk about VAV systems versus constant systems, you must measure and have a device capable of measuring the minimal amount of air intake. Constant volume systems must balance the outdoor airflow to the design minimum outdoor airflow rate as defined by ASHRAE. For residential projects carbon monoxide monitors must be installed on each floor or unit. Any indoor fireplaces must have solid glass enclosures or doors that seal when closed. Basically you can’t have an open fireplace.

Natural Ventilation

For naturally ventilated spaces CIBSE AM10 manual includes a flow chart for determining if natural ventilation is feasible for a project. Once you find out if natural ventilation will be effective, start collecting information about the rooms to be used for the calculations including: Minimum ceiling heights

Location of openings

Size of the openings

Run the calculations to determine if any design modifications are necessary. ASHRAE 62.1-2010 requires that all spaces with natural ventilation must have mechanical ventilation backup unless they are either: An engineered system approved by an authority with jurisdiction The natural ventilation openings have controls that prevent closing during

occupied hours, or if the zone isn’t served by heating or cooling equipment For naturally ventilated spaces (and for mixed-mode systems when the mechanical ventilation is inactivated), comply with at least one of the following strategies. Provide a direct exhaust airflow measurement device capable of measuring the

exhaust airflow. This device must measure the exhaust airflow with an accuracy of plus or minus 10% of the design minimum exhaust airflow rate. An alarm must indicate when airflow values vary by 15% or more from the exhaust airflow setpoint.

Provide automatic indication devices on all natural ventilation openings intended to meet the minimum opening requirements. An alarm must indicate when any one of the openings is closed during occupied hours.

Page 176: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

176

Monitor carbon dioxide (CO2) concentrations within each thermal zone. CO2 monitors must be between 3 and 6 feet (900 and 1,800 millimeters) above the floor and within the thermal zone. CO2 monitors must have an audible or visual indicator or alert the building automation system if the sensed CO2 concentration exceeds the setpoint by more than 10%. Calculate appropriate CO2 setpoints using the methods in ASHRAE 62.1–2010.

Healthcare projects have an additional reference standard to face that’s covered under ASHRAE 170 – 2008. This standard addresses minimum air quality for operating rooms.

IEQ Credit 1 | Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Strategies

This credit improves the air quality beyond the prerequisite basics. Option 1 Enhanced IAQ strategies can earn one point.

And/or Option 2 Additional enhanced IAQ strategies can earn one point.

This is a type of hodgepodge credit. Between the two options there are a total of 10 different strategies. Depending on what type of ventilation the project uses – mechanical, natural, or mixed – and which options the project team selects, the requirements vary. The basic concept is there are multiple sources of contamination in your building, from people, to cars, or equipment. The requirements try to control the pollutants.

Area of Awareness

Mechanically ventilated spaces must address: entryway systems

interior cross-contamination prevention

filtration

Naturally ventilated spaces must address: entryway systems

natural ventilation design calculations

Mixed-mode systems must address: entryway systems

interior cross-contamination prevention

filtration

natural ventilation design calculations

mixed-mode design calculations

Page 177: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

177

Entryway Systems

Install a permanent entryway at least 10 feet long in the primary direction of travel. Grills, grates, and slotted systems that can be cleaned underneath are good choices. Roll-out mats can be used if they are cleaned at least once a week. Permanent entryway systems are considered most effective. The systems must be installed at all regularly used exterior entrances to the building-including employee entrances and loading docks.

Interior Cross-Contamination Prevention

Sufficiently exhaust each space with hazardous gases or chemicals, such as garages, housekeeping, copy or print rooms, or science labs. This is accomplished by Preventing air from exfiltration of the space

Creating negative pressure to adjacent spaces

Providing self-closing doors

Installing deck-to-deck partitions or a hard lid ceiling

Exhausting at a rate of at least 0.50 cubic feet per minute per square foot, with no air recirculation

During your design identify all spaces that could cause cross contamination. Ventilate rooms with hazardous gases or chemicals. Ensure the rooms have doors, because the project cannot earn credit for a room with no doors. Locate chemical storage rooms, such as janitorial rooms, away from highly occupied areas. Open garages-meaning access to free exchange of fresh air are exempt from the requirements, as are copy and print rooms with convenience equipment. A common troublesome scenario is a garage under a building. To qualify for this option the garage would need: A self-closing door to occupied areas

Deck –to–deck partitions sealing the building from garage

Make –up air to maintain negative air pressurization

Separate exhaust to the outside with no air recirculation

If anything is drawing air into the room and not pushing air out, then separate exhaust is needed to the outside. The air from that room must be fully separated both mechanically and through doors and open spaces from other air in the building.

Filtration

MERV 13 (F7) filtration is required for HVAC systems that supplies outdoor air to occupied spaces. During your design make sure to account for the extra resistance in air

Page 178: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

178

flow that results from using better rated filters in the system. Plugging in better filters into an air flow system that can’t handle it results in greater energy use and an inefficient system. All of the filters must be replaced after construction and before the building is occupied.

Natural Ventilation Design Calculations

Here you’re just proving your design follows the CIBSE AM10 standard Natural Ventilation in Non-Domestic Buildings. Review the standard and prepare diagrams or narratives describing how guidance from the standard was considered as part of the design. For Option 1 the room-by-room calculations are not required.

Mixed-mode design calculations

Here you are proving your design follows the strategies from the CIBSE Manual 13 standard for Mixed Mode Ventilation.

Additional Enhanced IAQ Strategies

Depending on the type of ventilation, incorporate one of the following strategies into the project. For mechanically ventilated spaces, select one of the following four strategies exterior contamination prevention

increased ventilation

carbon dioxide monitoring

additional source control and monitoring

For naturally ventilated spaces, select one of the following three strategies: exterior contamination prevention

additional source control and monitoring

natural ventilation room by room calculations

For mixed-mode systems, select one of the following four strategies: exterior contamination prevention

increased ventilation

additional source control and monitoring

natural ventilation room-by-room calculations

Page 179: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

179

Exterior Contamination Prevention

For this strategy the project team is designing the outdoor air intakes to minimize pollutants coming in. Intakes located one third of the way up the side of the building are the best choice. This choice is going to require modeling of the system. Reference the pollutants regulated by National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS), and don’t allow them to exceed the maximum concentrations. To test the contaminant levels, one of the project team members will need to ensure through the results of computational fluid dynamics (CFD) modeling, Gaussian dispersion analyses, wind tunnel modeling, or tracer gas modeling. The model is used to perform a worst case scenario level 1 screening. If the level 1 screening indicates a noncompliant system, a level 2 screening with more detailed inputs is required.

Increased Ventilation

Increase breathing zone outdoor air ventilation rates to all occupied spaces by at least 30% above the minimum rates as determined in IEQ Prerequisite Minimum Indoor Air Quality Performance. What you're doing for this credit is improving on the prerequisite levels. For mechanically ventilated spaces, projects must increase outdoor airflow rates by 30%. The minimum rate is set by ASHRAE 62.1-2010. Instead of just meeting the prerequisite, go 30 percent beyond it. This is very similar to minimum energy performance and optimized energy performance. One is a prerequisite and one is a credit option for going a certain percent beyond the standard. Design the building to provide occupants optimal IAQ. Most of the design will come from meeting the standards and recommendations based on the type of ventilation being put in. The engineers and design team will have to meet the requirements in the standards. Make sure you check outside the building and evaluate what is around the building and the area to prevent poor quality air from coming in. For the calculations the engineers and design teams must build to these standards. For mechanical systems the ventilation rate procedure will be used to show a 30% increase in ventilation to all occupied spaces at all times the space is occupied. Any increase in the ventilation will impact the energy use calculations in EA Credit Optimize Energy Performance.

Page 180: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

180

Carbon Dioxide Monitoring

The idea is if you are going to provide a certain amount of outside air for the prerequisite, you should be able to monitor that air to prove in an objective sense the ventilation system maintains the design minimum requirements. To ensure that occupants receive the air supply that was designed, install CO2 sensors in occupied spaces at 3 to 6 feet (900 to 1,800 milimeters) above the floor. That’s the breathing zone. You are measuring the density of CO2, and if more outdoor air is required. For mechanically ventilated spaces, monitor CO2 concentrations in densely occupied spaces. A densely occupied space has 25 people or more per 1,000 square feet. What you usually find is CO2 monitors are necessary in multi-occupant spaces like conference rooms. Monitor CO2 concentrations in all naturally ventilated spaces. There’s no thermostat in there, you just turn off the radiator or open the window or some combination. Install a CO2 sensor that could be tied back to a building management system, or that could alarm locally within that room to tell when CO2 concentration levels exceed a certain amount.

CO2 Sensors

Determine space density and occupancy type. Measure to detect when the system is 10% below the designed outdoor air rate. Accurately put the CO2 sensors in the breathing zone and then calibrate the building automation system to signal an alarm when the ventilation is out of range. An alarm has to be triggered if the CO2 concentration exceeds the setpoint by more than 10%. The idea here is to make it quite a tangible system where you say, “Okay, this system knows that there’s a problem.” It doesn’t need to be a siren but some sort of alarm to the building operator to know that something is not in the acceptable limits. Building commissioning connects to this credit because the CO2 sensors are included in the commissioning process.

Additional Source Control and Monitoring

If your project has spaces where there might be other contaminants other than CO2, come up with a plan to reduce the likelihood of contaminant release, and install monitoring systems with alarms that get triggered when the thresholds are exceeded.

Page 181: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

181

Natural Ventilation ‘room-by-room’

The last strategy is natural ventilation room-by-room calculations Follow CIBSE AM10, Section 4, Design Calculations, to predict that room-by-room airflows will provide effective natural ventilation. This is usually going to require a macroscopic, multi-zone, analytic model. Very simply, natural ventilation is more complex than mechanical ventilation. You're looking at CIBSE for natural ventilation design. Evaluate local climate, building magnitude, orientation, purpose, and future operational needs. For naturally ventilated spaces think of it this way: Consider a room with a window and a radiator beneath it. It’s easy to say that room will be ventilated. It’s a little bit harder to say that the room is going to get increased ventilation. What you have to do is prove through diagrams or calculations how the cross-ventilation is going to provide this room with more outside air than a conventional design.

Rating System Adaptation

There are additional guidelines for warehouses, distribution centers, healthcare and data centers and residential projects. Warehouse projects pursuing the entryway systems strategy do not have to put the entryway systems in doorways from the exterior into loading decks or garage areas. However, they must be provided from the loading docks and garages into interior spaces like offices. Consider the intent to separate exterior contaminants from interior spaces. Healthcare projects pursuing the entryway systems strategy must provide pressurized vestibules, in addition to entryway systems, at high-volume building entrances. Data centers pursuing filtration strategy are only required to provide enhanced filtration to regularly occupied spaces. Consider the intent to serve building occupants. LEED recognizes the economic impact of enhanced filtration and balances their use with programmatic needs.

Testing the Concept

It sounds like a good idea in concept, but enhanced occupant health often bears a tradeoff with energy efficiency. How can the additional energy needed for increasing the ventilation in a building be mitigated? The most direct factors are within the system design. Heat-recovery ventilation and/or economizer strategies in your mechanical ventilation system help reduce the extra energy needed for increased ventilation.

Page 182: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

182

IEQ Prerequisite 2 | Environmental Tobacco Smoke Control

The intent is to prevent or minimize exposure of building occupants, indoor surfaces, and ventilation air distribution systems to environmental tobacco smoke.

Requirements

This prerequisite has different options depending on the type of project. First however, every project must prohibit smoking inside the building. That’s no smoking under any conditions-even separately exhausted isolated smoking rooms, like in an airport. Outside the building, smoking is prohibited except in designated smoking areas located at least 25 feet (7.5 meters) from all entries, outdoor air intakes, and operable windows. Projects must also prohibit smoking outside the property line in spaces used for business purposes. If your local code allows the smoking areas to be closer than 25 feet (7.5 meters) than you have to document the codes to allow your project to not meet this requirement. At all building entrances, there must be signs indicated the building has a no-smoking policy. The signs must be posted within 10 feet (3 meters) of all building entrances. Projects that do not designate smoking areas will find that people are going to smoke anyway, and unfortunately they don’t know where to go. It is better to designate a space, otherwise people just end up smoking where they please and leaving cigarette butts for the maintenance crew to clean up. Not designating a space is not going to stop people from smoking.

Residential Compliance

Residential projects sometimes allow smoking in the individual units. Especially in situations where individuals purchase condos, the building owner cannot stop the residents from smoking inside their unit. For residential projects you can meet the prerequisite by having a no smoking policy that meets the requirements just described, that’s Option 1. Option 2 is compartmentalizing the smoking areas. For option 2, if you allow smoking within the residence, provide ETS rooms that are separately ventilated and have negative pressure and exhaust. That’s important – the ventilation and exhaust can’t connect to the ventilation and exhaust from non-smoking rooms. What you are essentially designing is a room that’s separated from every other room. Air won't leak out through the doors, and that air won't mix with other ventilation air in the building. There are full height walls so the air won't travel above the acoustical ceiling and then mix in with other areas. You are fully segregating this area.

Page 183: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

183

In residential projects, LEED asks that you to take it a step further because you're dealing with people’s residences where smoking is allowed. Smoking in common areas is prohibited. These next requirements are all related to keeping the smoke in the rooms and from ex-filtrating to other areas. Weather strip doors and operable windows, weather strip doors in common hallways, and seal penetrations. Once the space is sealed, you have to prove the spaces won’t ex-filtrate the smoky air by conducting a blower door test. For this case you again need to prohibit smoking within 25’ (7.5 meters) of entries, air intakes and operable windows and provide signage to allow smoking in designated areas. For verifying compartmentalization of rooms a contractor will usually conduct a blower door test that follows one of several standards: RESNET, Energy Start Multifamily Testing Protocols, ASTM E779-03 or ASTM E1827-11. For this prerequisite, first you need to prohibit smoking in all common or public area. Install signage to appropriately locate smoking areas. Properly design, test, and verify interior smoking room compliance. This prerequisite must be enforced, so the owner and facility manager must draft policies to enforce smoking regulations, and the facility manager must enforce them.

IEQ Credit 2 | Low Emitting Materials

The intent of this credit is to reduce concentrations of chemical contaminants that can damage air quality, human health, productivity, and the environment. Contaminants are measured as either VOC content or air emissions. Emissions are typically a result of the VOC content, but vary in concentration related to manufacturing and use. VOC content is normally self-declared by the manufacturer. For the emissions tests, there are third-party certifiers. It is not feasible to eliminate all VOCs from your project, but by following the guidelines presented in this credit, project teams can significantly reduce occupant exposure to harmful chemicals. For all projects with the exception of healthcare and schools, you are considering all products inside the weatherproofing membrane. For healthcare and schools, you include the exterior applied products as well.

Scope

This credit has two options. Each can earn 1 to 3 points. Option 1 is product category calculations-a prescriptive path for selecting materials that meet the thresholds of compliance. Option 2 is a budget calculation method for using materials that exceed threshold requirements.

Page 184: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

184

For option one, there are seven material categories to comply with; they are: Interior paints and coatings that are applied on site Interior adhesives and sealants that are applied on site Flooring Composite wood Ceilings, walls, thermal, and acoustic insulation Furniture, if within your scope of work Exterior applied products, healthcare and school projects only

For option two, there are six assemblies to organize compliance: flooring ceilings walls thermal and acoustic insulation furniture exterior applied products (Healthcare, Schools only)

Option 1: Product Category

The threshold of compliance varies depending on the product category. The important numbers to remember are 90% and 100%.

Category   VOC threshold  Emissions Threshold

Interior paints and coatings applied on site  100%  90% 

Interior adhesives and sealants applied on 

site (including flooring adhesive) 

100%  90% 

Flooring   100%  100% 

Composite wood   100%  100% 

Ceilings, walls, thermal, and 

acoustic insulation 

100%  100% 

Furniture (if included in scope of work)  90% by cost  90% by cost 

Exterior applied products  

(Schools and Healthcare only) 

90% by volume  90% by volume 

Option 2: System Assembly

Option 2 is a budget calculation method. If some of the products in a category don’t meet the criteria for option one, project teams can use the budget calculation method. Product calculations can be demonstrated in an assembly with multiple layers: exterior, structure, interior, and then as a total of all systems. Use information from the manufacturer. At least 50% of the assembly must be compliant to count towards the credit, otherwise it counts as 0% compliant. If 90% of the assembly meets the criteria it can count as 100%,

Page 185: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

185

allowing the project to show a higher overall compliance. Because of the way the calculation method works project teams might be able to earn more points with this option. Part of what makes this complicated, is you have to look at the surface area of each layer. If you’re doing flooring for example you have to look at the subfloor, and the adhesive and the finished floor each as separate layers. Calculate those separately, and then take the average of the assemblies.

Timeline

During your design, research potential low or non-emitting finishes and furniture for the project. The design team and contractor will be responsible for specifying what to buy and gathering the necessary material safety data sheets, test reports, or third party certificates to document compliance. During construction review, select products to make sure they meet the requirements, and ensure that any substituted products comply as well. Review the products to make sure they meet the 90% or 100% category thresholds for option 1. For any wet applied products they must meet the 90% emissions criteria as well as the 100% VOC criteria. This includes interior paints and coatings, or adhesives and sealants applied onsite. If there is a standard in your local jurisdiction that has been adopted that is more restrictive than the LEED standard then you are allowed to use that standard. Project teams will need to demonstrate why it’s more restrictive. An example is carpeting in California.

3rd Party Certification

USGBC provides a Low-Emitting Materials Third Party Certification table that lists acceptable certifications for the LEED v4 EQ Credit Low-Emitting Materials. This list will be updated often to add programs as they become eligible. Note that the LEED v4 credit also requires reporting on TVOC levels. The programs deemed acceptable may already include this information - if they do not, project teams must request this additional information.

FloorScore Greenguard Certified

SCS Indoor Advantage

Collaborative for High Performance Schools (CHPS)

BIFMA level (if 7.6.1 and/or 7.6.2 were achieved)

TPC list CARB ULEF label or CARB Exempt

NSF-332 Greenguard Gold SCS Indoor Advantage

Page 186: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

186

All manufacturer’s data stating VOC content must adhere to the guidelines in CDPH SM V1.1–2010, Section 8. Laboratory testing verifying emissions claims must be accredited under ISO/IEC 17025 for the test methods they use.

USGBC Tools

When you are calculating for low-emitting materials, USGBC provides a tool that project teams can download. Use the Low-Emitting Materials Calculator to track and document purchases offline. The calculator includes VOC content limits from reference standards. Use the summary tab in the calculator to complete the form in LEED Online. The calculator covers both options for achieving the credit. If the products that you are using meet the standards, they can be listed in the spreadsheet. If the product goes over the standard or allowable limits, you can do a budget calculation method where you evaluate the assembly of the products and hopefully parts of the assembly will be low enough to meet the overall budget requirements.

IEQ Credit 3 | Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan

The intent of this credit is to promote the well-being of construction workers and building occupants by minimizing indoor air quality problems associated with construction and renovation. Credit requirements apply only to the construction phase. The general contractor implements an IAQ plan that complies with the SMACNA guidelines. The SMACNA guidelines apply to a number of areas, and applying them depends on the specifics of the project.

Implementation

For your implementation, the first step is to create the IAQ management plan before construction. Contractors and field personnel need to be educated about the plan and how to implement the plan. SMACNA guidelines address indoor air quality in 5 major areas: HVAC protection Source control Pathway interruption Housekeeping Scheduling

HVAC protection implies keeping new ductwork free form dust until first use. When ductwork is delivered to the site, seal the ends and protect from contaminants prior to

Page 187: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

187

install and use. This means using plastic to cover the ductwork so it does not collect dust inside. Source control addresses keeping high VOC materials out of the building in the first place. If there are materials with VOCs, the plan must address how the VOCs are to be controlled. This could be anything from sealing paint cans when not in use, or specifying no-VOC paint. The precise directive depends on what the project reauires. Pathway interruption is ensuring that contaminants don't spread into occupied or finished areas. If cutting or sanding occur in a certain area, consider blocking it off from other areas to prevent spreading dust or debris everywhere. Projects can isolate areas and prevent occupied areas from being contaminated by: Ventilating using outside air

Providing temporary barriers between work areas and non-work areas

Depressurizing the work area to contain dust and odors

Projects must think about housekeeping, such as how much you sweep and how much you clean up. Ideally, it occurs daily to prevent accidents as well as accumulation of contaminants. Scheduling considers practical space issues related to deliveries as well as potential exposure to indoor air contamination. Conduct high pollution activities during off hours such as weekends or evenings. For instance if you're going to be spray painting, that is a task that should be done at the end of day so workers don’t need to be exposed to lingering smells. This keeps the paint vapors from being inhaled by the building occupants. In addition to SMACNA guidelines, LEED adds the following three requirements. Protecting absorptive materials from moisture damage. Moisture infiltration during construction can lead to very dangerous conditions during occupancy. This strategy prevents mold. Pay close attention to storing materials inside the building before it is enclosed and weatherproof. Sealing in mold will cost you a lot more than replacing water-damaged materials. If you plan to operate air handlers during construction, replace the filters often, because they will get clogged up sooner than under normal operating conditions. The key here is using MERV 8 filtration media (or F5 or higher) during construction. If part of the building is occupied, and part under construction, MERV 8 filtration media would be on the return air ducts. The air leaving the site is filtered to not send construction dust to other areas of the building. All of these filters must be replaced prior to occupancy. ASHRAE 52.2 addresses the filtration media in depth.

Page 188: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

188

Finally, prohibit smoking inside the building and 25 feet (7.5 meters) from building entrances once the building is enclosed. This speaks to the contractors working in the building. Regardless if it doesn’t have a roof, the ETS can penetrate into materials and off gas while the building is occupied.

Healthcare

For healthcare projects, especially renovations where part of the building remains occupied, there are enhanced requirements to protect occupants from construction disturbance. First, engage the owner, design, and contractor in an infection control risk evaluation. Next, create an environmental quality management plan (EQMP). It must addresses moisture, particulates, VOCs, outdoor emissions, tobacco, noise and vibration, and infection control. If sound levels exceed 85 dB, contractors must wear ear protection. Maintain consistent circulation paths and reduce equipment idling time.

IEQ Credit 4 | Indoor Air Quality Assessment

The intent of this credit is to establish better quality indoor air in the building after construction and before occupancy. This credit is designed to verify that air is clean before people regularly occupy the building. The window of time between construction and occupancy is very slim, so there are two options that can be done in either two hours or two weeks. Option 1 flush-out can earn one point. Option 2 air testing can earn two points.

Flush-out

The first option is a flush out. The goal is to introduce 14,000 cubic feet of 100% outdoor air per square foot (4,267,140 liters per second) of floor area. The idea is that the building interior contains lingering contaminants from construction activities and material off gassing, which is dramatically reduced after two weeks of installation, and this practice ‘flushes out’ the contaminants. The strategy uses fresh outside air, and pushes it through the building while maintaining temperature and humidity as noted: at least 60°F (15°C) and no higher than 80°F (27°C) and relative humidity no higher than 60%. This is the general approach. Knowing that people often want to move in and don't want to sit with their building flushing out for two weeks, the second path for option one allows the spaces to be occupied after flushing out with 3,500 cubic feet per square foot (1,066,260 liters) of air. Once a quarter of the flush out is done, people can occupy the building. LEED requires a minimum rate of 0.3 cubic feet per minute per square foot (or 1.5 liters per second per

Page 189: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

189

square meter) of outside air throughout the day until a total of 14,000 CFM per square foot has been reached. When doing a flush out when the building is occupied, the flush out must begin at least 3 hours prior to occupancy and continue during occupancy. The key numbers to remember are 14,000 CFM per square foot prior to occupancy for path 1, and 3,500 for path 2, continuing up to 14,000 while an occupied flush out occurs. In both paths, the internal temperature must be at least 60°F (15°C), no higher than 80°F (27°C) and relative humidity no higher than 60%.

Air Testing

The second option is air testing. From a practical standpoint, testing is quick and easy, but requires special equipment. You call an IAQ tester and he or she is going to come in, sit in your site for about four hours, and they are going to check that the air doesn’t exceed maximum concentrations of the listed contaminants. This is done prior to occupancy after interior finishes are installed. The test needs to be conducted during normal occupied hours while the ventilation system is running at the minimum outdoor air flow rate throughout the test. Testing may sound easier, but it’s harder to obtain acceptable results. Moreover, if the test results fail, then a flush out of that space is going to be needed prior to re-testing. Project teams will need to determine where the testing locations in the building are going to be, typically those areas with the least ventilation and highest concentration of VOCs – the worst case scenario. At least one test per floor must be completed, and at least one location per ventilation system for each occupied space type. Testing locations occur in the breathing zone, between 3 and 6 feet (900 and 1,800 millimeters) above the floor. Once the testing is complete an IAQ report is generated for documentation. Look carefully at the contaminants listed below, as they are related to other credits. For instance, formaldehyde is related to the composite wood credit threshold in low emitting materials.

Contaminant  Maximum Level  Healthcare Max  Standard 

Formaldehyde  27 ppb  16.3 ppb  ASTM D5197 

Particulates  PM10: 50 micrograms/m3; 

PM2.5: 15 micrograms/ 

m3 

20 micrograms/ m3  EPA 

compendium 

Method IP‐10 

Ozone  0.075 ppm  0.075 ppm  ASTM D1549‐02 

Page 190: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

190

TVOC  500 microgram/ m3  200 microgram/ m3  EPA 

compendium 

Method IP‐10 

CDPH 

standard 

method 

Table 4‐1  Table 4‐1  ASTM D5197 

Carbon 

monoxide 

9ppm; no more than 2 

ppm above outdoor levels 

9ppm; no more 

than 2 ppm above 

outdoor levels 

EPA 

compendium 

Method IP‐3 

Timeline

This credit cannot be documented until ALL construction work, punch-list items, and final cleaning have been completed. Finalize all cleaning, and balance and test the HVAC system. Commissioning can occur during the flushout but only if the commissioning activities don’t introduce contaminants in the building. MERV 13 (F7) or better filters should be installed prior to a flush out if the project is pursuing enhanced indoor air quality strategies. Projects may have a harder time scheduling Option 1, depending on how the contracts are setup. The mechanical engineer can generate a preliminary estimate for the flush-out duration before the construction schedule is set. Many contractors don’t want the building owner setting foot in the building until the keys are handed over. It’s hard to install all the furniture and furnishings required for the flush-out when the contractor or insurance company won’t let the stuff be moved in because of liability. In that case, consider the occupied flush-out.

Calculations

How do you calculate how much air is needed? You must know the square feet of the building area, and the required metric of 14,000 cf/sf. Let’s look at an example of a building that is a 60,000 square foot office. For a non-phased flush-out multiply 60,000 by 14,000 which comes out to 840,000,000 cubic feet of air needed before occupancy. Now, how long before the building can be occupied? You need to know how much air the air handler is capable of moving. In this case, let’s assume yrou mechanical design engineer let you know that the system is capable of pumping 20,000 cubic feet per minute.

Page 191: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

191

840,000,000 cubic feet divided by 20,000 cubic feet per minute equals 42,000 minutes. That comes out to 29.1 days of flush-out before the occupants can move in. A typical building flushout takes twenty to thirty days. That’s a long time for a building to be idle which is why a phased flushout would most likely occur. Some teams would rather pursue air quality testing because it’s even faster to complete. The duration can depend on the region the building is located in if the region is humid or cold.

IEQ Credit 5 | Thermal Comfort

The intent of this credit is to promote occupants’ productivity, comfort, and well-being by designing for high quality thermal comfort and providing occupant controls. Projects have to meet the requirements for both thermal comfort design and thermal comfort control. For the design of the system there are two options. Option 1 is ASHRAE 55-2010 Option 2 is ISO and CEN standards

Referenced Standards

For option 1, design the HVAC system to meet ASHRAE 55-2010. Thermal comfort is defined by ASHRAE 55-2010 demonstrated by curves of target factors. The measurement includes air temperature, radiant temperature, air speed, humidity and personal factors such as clothing and activity. Projects that have natatoriums (typically schools or health clubs) must demonstrate compliance with Typical Natatorium Design Conditions in ASHRAE Handbook. It’s important to know the six comfort factors according to ASHRAE 55. Understand that people’s activity (metabolic rate) and clothing impact thermal comfort as much as obvious factors like air temperature, thermal radiation, air speed, and humidity. Imagine a worker in a naturally ventilated warehouse that is manually moving boxes around on a hot summer day. The person has different thermal needs than an office worker in a wool suit. Those are all things that you want to anticipate in the design. For option 2, you’re designing the system to the ISO 7730:2005, Ergonomics of the Thermal Environment or the CEN Standard EN 15251:2007, Indoor Environmental Input Parameters for Design and Assessment of Energy Performance of Buildings. CEN standards are intended for use in international projects.

50% Individual Thermal Controls

Thermal comfort controls are required to serve at least 50% of building occupants, as well 100% of all multi-occupant spaces. If the building has natural or mixed mode

Page 192: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

192

ventilation that includes operable windows, the operable windows count as an individual control. A question you may have is “How would you give thermal comfort controls to 50 percent of the occupants?” Projects can put that many thermostats around, and it’s easy to control zones like that, but sometimes that strategy necessitates too many thermostats and too many zones for economic balance. Generally, this is done through under floor air distribution. Occupants can have more or less air directed to their stations. In addition, radiant panels or plug in humidifiers also meet credit requirements. The control can adjust any comfort parameter, not just temperature or air speed, although those are common practices.

Implementation

The comfort of occupants can be impacted by something as simple as the orientation of the building. Evaluate the building orientation and solar heat gain. An occupant sitting in the sun all day will probably be much warmer than a person in the shade all day. Start with operable blinds to help balance energy efficiency as well as occupant comfort. If operable windows are used to provide control, you must evaluate site specific conditions, such as wind, sound, and odors. If you provide an operable window but the window is 30 feet from a busy street, the comfort problem is solved but now there is a noise issue. If the building is downwind from a landfill or a paper mill, odors can come in through the windows. You see that there is more to it than just installing a window that opens. Some controls and systems to consider are Individual thermostat controls

Individual control of radiant panels

Radiant heating

Natural ventilation actuators

Ceiling fans

Under-floor air distribution systems

IEQ Credit 6 | Interior Lighting

The intent is to promote occupants’ productivity, comfort, and well-being by providing high-quality lighting. Most buildings are over illuminated. They don’t take into account available daylight or sunlight, and they illuminate spaces that are vacant. Projects end up with a lot of fixtures that just waste energy. Automated lighting controls not only save

Page 193: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

193

energy, but helps people be more productive and comfortable. Lighting systems should be studied at the same time as thermal comfort. There are two options for this credit, each worth one point. Option 1 Lighting control Option 2 Lighting quality

90% Individual Lighting Controls

For Option 1, 90 percent of the building occupants must have task lighting, and the building must have three-way lighting controls for all shared multi-occupant spaces. Lighting controls are the primary way to save energy on lighting. First by reducing operating hours – in other words switching the lights off. Light control also saves energy by reducing the wattage of the lights while they are on. Dimming lights saves energy for instance. Secondly, lighting control also reduces cooling levels. When you reduce light in a space you put out less heat in that space, therefore you don’t need to cool the space as much. The rule of thumb is for every three watts you save on lighting load you save about one watt on the cooling load. Also when you control artificial lighting, you also look at controlling the natural daylight entering though windows and manage the sunlight to make sure it is not a source of solar heat gain and glare. Lighting control strategies help to maximize the effectiveness of sunlight.

Lighting Levels

An upgraded requirement in LEED v4 is that the individual lighting controls must have at least 3 lighting levels – on, off, and a mid-level. So no more on-off switches only. What they are getting at is allowing each occupant to be able to dim-their personal lighting to their own preferences. In these spaces they want to make sure that you don’t necessarily always want to turn on every light, maybe you only need 2 of the 4 lights on. The midlevel must be between 30 to 70 percent of the maximum illumination level. Occupants that have personal control of their lighting, meaning the ability to select different light levels for the task they are working on, maintain their autonomy and efficiency throughout the day, whereas occupants that don’t have personal control have lower productivity. Other studies have shown that people that have control of their lights are more satisfied with their jobs, and are less likely to leave.

Lighting Quality

For option 2 lighting quality, projects must meet four of the following strategies:

Page 194: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

194

For lighting system strategies, recessed fixtures have to all be glare-free recessed

luminaires in regularly occupied spaces

The entire project must have a CRI of greater than 80, except for special uses

For lamp strategies, 75 percent of the connected load must have a lamp life greater than 24,000 hours

For indirect luminaires only, less than 25 percent of the connected load can be direct-only in regularly occupied spaces. Again - lighting everything up with the same two by four, plugging in, and reflect from the ceiling

For finish strategies for the walls, ceilings, floors, or furniture, reflectance levels should be approximately 80 percent on the ceiling, 50 percent on walls and 20 percent on floors.

If furniture is included in the scope, the average surface reflectance must be 45% for work surfaces and 50% for movable partitions.

For illuminance strategies, for at least 75 percent of regularly occupied floor area, ceilings or walls should have a 1 to 10 threshold to achieve occupant comfort

The last few are the reflective values of the walls, ceiling, floors, as well as the work surfaces. It's not enough now to just look at the types of lighting that we're including, but the actual reflection values of the finishes that we’re putting on the furnishings. We’re not just looking at the lighting fixtures or bulbs, but the systems furniture and the finishes of the space.

Strategies

Start by having the design team consider the owner and occupants’ needs for lighting controls. The energy model and engineers can define optimum design parameters. Be sure to include things like automatic sensors for turning off the lights when they aren’t needed in unoccupied rooms. For lighting quality, from the list of eight strategies, pick four to implement on the project. The first two strategies are more technical, but they are pretty easy given general practices. One of the strategies is that 75% of your connected load has to have a lamp life greater than 24,000 hours. Lamp life is fairly easy to get. For a linear florescent lamp that’s not much of a problem. When you look at a lamp life, it usually has a life given for 12 hour starts, or 3 hour starts. LEED is only looking at the 3-hour startup. For LED lights it means looking at the rated life information which is available for most fixtures.

Page 195: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

195

The other point of the strategy is a color rendering index (CRI) greater than 80. In general practice an 80 threshold is not that hard. A CRI of 80 makes the lighting look natural. For the lighting system choices projects can choose either recessed or indirect. For recessed lighting you are trying to light the space well and not have any uncomfortable space. The fixtures need to have a certain threshold for brightness. For a lighting designer this is called luminance and you are looking for a luminance of less than 2,500 per meter squared. LEED does allow for some exceptions. Only 25% of the lighting can be direct, so you will need to work with a lighting designer in your space to figure that out. This may be the toughest requirement, based on conventional design, but it will have significant positive impacts for your occupants. The last couple of quality strategies have to do with the finishes of the spaces. High reflectance on your finishes make the spaces feel brighter, and they are more uniform. Reflection off the surfaces always helps make things feel brighter, and you get more bang for your buck. Since it is a weighted average and 75% of the regularly occupied floor area has to meet the requirements, the project can still have accent walls. The last strategy has to do with luminance. This is how much light is on the plane of the surface. If you can't meet the other strategies outright, because you have a little bit more direct light or you don't have that recess option, this is the option to consider. Run the calculations and see how it meets the criteria. To meet those criteria you have to pay attention to the surface reluctance of the surfaces and the values. If you do the illuminance strategies, you are required to meet the finished strategies which means there are your four strategies for one point. When you light your ceilings and your walls you're going to compare the ceilings or walls to the values of your surfaces. You're going to need calculation software to do this. We are just looking for a 1 to 10 average ratio. Again, you pick if you want to compare your ceilings to your work surface or if you want to compare your walls to the work surface.

Calculations

For the calculations figure out what percent of workstations have individual controls, as a percentage of all of the workstations. Individual workstation is the term LEED uses for private offices and cubes. Bear in mind that term workstation doesn’t mean a desk. Remember – the individual task lighting and the shared occupant space lighting needs at least 3 lighting levels.

Page 196: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

196

Rating System Adaptations

Retail projects only have one option. For at least 90% of individual occupant spaces in office and administrative areas provide lighting controls. In sales areas provide dimming controls. It makes sense for this different requirement because with a retail project the retailer is going to want to have bright displays for products most of the time. For hospitality projects, guest rooms are assumed to have adequate lighting and aren’t included in the credit calculations. For healthcare projects, provide 90% of patients lighting controls from their beds.

IEQ Credit 7 | Daylight

The intent of this credit is to connect building occupants with the outdoors, reinforce circadian rhythms, and reduce the use of electrical lighting by introducing daylight into the space. It’s going to be very difficult on your project to get the maximum points available in LEED without any type of lighting control or daylight harvesting. If you are shooting for LEED Gold or LEED Platinum, you definitely have to look at reduced artificial lighting. Not because of the points available in this credit, because what you save in lighting costs from daylight or lighting control, you save in cooling load, which also helps with overall building management.

Glare

The biggest problem with daylighting is glare control, so the first requirement is to provide manual or automatic (with manual override) glare-control devices for all regularly occupied spaces. LEED is concerned that designers would just leave windows without any glare control, any window shades or any exterior louvers or anything like that. In this case, LEED asks you to bring in light, but bring it in a thoughtful way. Consider reflecting the light off of louvers or bringing it in through sun tubes as opposed to just straight through the windows.

Performance

There are 3 options for this credit: Option 1: Spatial Daylight Autonomy (2 to 3 points, 1 to 2 points for Healthcare) Option 2: Illuminance Calculations (1 to 2 points) Option 3: Measurement (2 to 3 points, 1 to 2 points for Healthcare)

Page 197: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

197

Spatial Daylight Autonomy

The first option is a computer simulation. We’ll cover the daylighting terms here, but keep in mind this is something that project teams should coordinate with a lighting designer or experienced architect. The credit awards the most points for a sophisticated and dynamic metric called spatial daylight autonomy, or sDA—the percentage of the “work plane” that is above 300 lux (28 footcandles) at least 50% of the time during occupied hours over the course of a whole year. Because this metric alone might encourage overglazing, the credit also requires glare simulations (in the form of annual sunlight exposure, or ASE) as a counterpoint. The concept of "daylight autonomy" means designing a space such that it maximizes the amount of useful daylight, thereby minimizing the need for electric light. In mathematical terms, daylight autonomy is the percentage of annual work hours during which all, or part, of the lighting needs can be met through daylighting alone. By understanding the way daylight autonomy is measured and implemented, architects and lighting designers can use shading and lighting control strategies that work together to create greater daylight autonomy while emphasizing aesthetics, maximizing owner investment, and minimizing energy use in their buildings. The success of a building's daylight design can be evaluated using daylight autonomy metrics. Each metric has a slightly different method of performance evaluation, but they all are used to quantify either the daylight harvesting potential, glare mitigation, or both. Three metrics that are particularly useful will be addressed. Spatial Daylight Autonomy (sDA) is the percentage of floor space where the required light level can be met completely with daylight for 50% of work hours. Based on the idea that more light is better, this metric indicates quantity of daylight available. A higher sDA yields greater autonomy from electric lighting. Annual Sunlight Exposure (aSE) is the percentage of work hours during which the light level from direct sun alone exceeds a predefined threshold (often 100 fc). This metric indicates quality of light related to direct sun glare, the worst type of glare. It does not, however, address issues related to potential glare from bright sky and reflections. Daylight Autonomy max (DAmax) is the percentage of work hours that the light level exceeds 10 times the required light level (often 300 fc). This metric is another indicator of quality, this time related to all types of glare. Only dynamic fenestration, such as automated shading solutions, will improve the latter two daylight autonomy metrics that evaluate quantity and quality of daylight. No passive

Page 198: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

198

systems can do this. For example, changing the tint on a window or adding overhangs and light shelves will reduce glare, but these methods will also reduce available daylight. These strategies can improve the aSE and DAmax metrics but do not improve the quantity of daylight penetration in the space characterized by sDA. Increasing window size will improve daylight availability but also increases the potential for glare and therefore only improves the sDA metric. For this option demonstrate through annual computer simulations that 300 lux are achieved for 50% of the hours between 8am and 6pm local time for a full calendar year. Basically, if you are going to do this simulation you have to show that the project is bringing in 300 watts of daylight for the regularly occupied floor. When you are measuring or modeling, you have to measure two times during the year. In the past you could measure at certain times to get an ideal situation, but now you are given two time periods during the year to measure. You are also taking into consideration the climate – the annual sunlight exposure and spatial daylight. In its basic form, the annual sunlight exposure is a measurement of area that exceeds 1,000 watts of direct sunlight, for more than 250 hours throughout the year. This evaluates glare. Your project has to be below 10% of the area that meets this template. That’s across all projects.

Illuminance Calculations

Option 2 is also a computer simulation, using illuminance calculations. This simulation is modeling at 9am and 3pm on the equinox. There is a bit of a difference here but it’s still based on the time of year data. A daylighting consultant will determine the simulation inputs, including the exterior building geometry, site plan, floor and furniture plan, interior finishes, glazing, and local climate data. This data will be input into an illuminance simulation to determine the illuminance values for all regularly occupied floor areas and to verify the project does not exceed the credit requirement values. It is more simplified than option 1 and yields fewer points.

Measurement

With Option 3 you can do a physical measurement where you are measuring the daylight illuminance levels in the space at a certain time of year, and then four months later take the measurements again. By doing this, you can prove the project is bringing enough daylight into the space. The lighting designer will determine where the measurements will be taken, and then use a lighting measure in the actual space to record the data. The IES lighting handbook provides more information about light meters.

Page 199: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

199

Daylight Modeling for Ideal Results

Many of the challenges already outlined can be overcome with a detailed daylighting analysis or daylight modeling. Daylighting analysis is an essential component of any attempt to incorporate natural lighting into a design. It is used as a way to predict available daylight, and as a result the lighting energy used in a space or an entire building. A daylighting analysis or model is best developed before a design is implemented based on assumptions about local climate conditions and building operations rather than actual data. A daylighting analysis will take into consideration factors such as light levels in different locations; the effects of various features such as overhangs, glazing types and placements, space configurations, ceiling heights, and window treatments; as well as schedules for use of the space. The goal of such an analysis is to establish the optimal combination of fixtures, features, and architectural design elements across multiple points during the day, week, or month in order to produce the maximum uniform daylight (measured in design lux levels) with minimum negative heat transfer for two-thirds of the daytime. To accomplish this task, designers will use either physical modeling or computer modeling software.

Building Orientation

Would you rather have your office window facing North, South, East, or West? What about your bedroom window? Perhaps one of the most important factors in achieving effective daylighting results is building orientation. We already know that the sun tracks from east to west in the sky, which impacts how much sunlight glazing receives depending on their location within the building. As a result, building orientation must be considered early on in order to achieve effective daylight design results. To start, for buildings constructed in the northern hemisphere, the orientation should be along the east-west axis if at all possible. This will ensure glazing receives as much daylight exposure as possible along the north and south faces of the building. Next, it’s important to locate those spaces which will get the most use and can benefit the greatest from daylighting so that their windows face either south or north, especially if side lighting will be a large part of the design rather than top lighting. If budget is a concern, a single story building will be more affordable in terms of daylighting designs. It’s always more expensive to install systems such as atriums, courtyards, and advanced optical lighting systems. Though buildings with fewer floors require more land, they allow for the maximum use of side lights and roof monitors without complex and expensive systems for bringing daylight deep into the building.

Page 200: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

200

Account for Shading from Landscaping and Adjacent Buildings

Neighboring buildings and landscape features can also either help or hinder your daylight harvesting efforts. For instance, if adjacent buildings are taller and/or positioned in such a way as to create shade, daylight results will be substantially lower. The same is true for large trees and other landscaping features. It’s therefore important to consider the overall site layout including next door sites to avoid unintentional shading. That said, strategic use of landscape designs and shade from adjacent buildings can benefit a daylight scheme if they provide shade during summer months but (because of the angle of the sun throughout the year) permit more daylight penetration during winter months. Careful consideration of the sun’s orientation from season to season is extremely important when contemplating the impacts of these neighboring structures and features.

Account for Reflectance from Adjacent Surfaces

How light is reflected off of surfaces external to a building will have an impact on the effectiveness of a daylighting design. Too much reflectance will result in unwanted glare; not enough will diminish the potential to reduce reliance on electric lighting. Therefore, any daylight design should take the adjacent surfaces into consideration.

Technology and Trends

We mentioned thinking about things like glare control or heat gain, building in things like atriums and skylights, and using shallow floor plates. That’s what they ask that you design so light comes in well. If you look at buildings designed 120 years ago, everybody was smart about this design because there weren’t light switches on the wall, and everyone was taking advantage of daylight. We’ve gotten away from that because it’s been so easy to put a light here or there.

Occupancy

Once the construction project is complete and all hammers and nails have been put away, it’s important to test and measure the results of a daylighting design. Often referred to as a post-occupancy analysis, this step involves evaluating the combination of physical designs and human interaction with them in order to tweak the system with modifications to the physical features and/or changes in human behavior. Normally this type of analysis involves measuring light levels at various times of the day and different times of the year. A good method for accomplishing a post-occupancy analysis is to go through a formal project commissioning, which is a systematic method for ensuring all of the daylighting systems perform as expected both individually and collectively. These systems are measured against the contract, design intent, and operational requirements. Going through this step helps to guarantee that quality work is done on your project, that all

Page 201: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

201

systems are calibrated properly, and often provides an opportunity for the installers to orient building occupants on the use of the daylighting systems. A typical model of limited complexity will take anywhere from two to three weeks once your analyst has all the required information. This includes floor plans, site plans, roof plan with elevations and sections, plus information about the kinds of materials, fenestration visual transmittance, surrounding buildings, site conditions, location and the structure’s intended use.

Case Study

From a visible, tangible aspect, the most sustainable feature the LEED certified HKS headquarters in Dallas, Texas has is an LED lighting system that’s fully integrated with a window shade system. It is a complete daylight autonomy system. There are daylight sensors and occupancy sensors. The conference rooms are set with vacancy sensors, so you have to physically turn on light if you want light. HKS did a lot of computer studies for their site. The energy modeler looked at glare issues and daylighting issues. The existing building had a lot of single pane glass, which was a big concern in Texas in the summer. There was also concern about having a lot of glass on the lower level. Originally the plan had a lot of workstations on the lower level, and the glare would have hit the workstations, as well as those on the upper levels. The energy study made the team realize having shades on all four sides of the building would be necessary. The energy study influenced the design decisions by showing it wasn’t so much the direct sunlight that would cause the glare, but the sunlight bouncing off the adjacent buildings around the project site. The daylight harvesting is gradual and built into four segments for the room, where automated shades are built into the daylighting system. The shades and daylighting system are all controlled by an iPad app from Lutron. The app allows manual changes to the lights and shades. Sensors on the windows monitor the daylight and cloudiness. Wireless sensors dropped down from the ceiling talk to the system and dim the lights throughout the day. When someone walks in the office in the morning all of the lights are off. The occupancy sensors kick everything on. One of HKS’ impressive energy achievements is reducing the lighting power density down to 0.6 watts per square foot. The hard work to get this number came from smart lighting design and using all LED lighting – about 95% LED through the entire project. However the lighting runs at about 75% of that because the employees said they could work with less light. Each desk has task lighting with built in sensors. When the light doesn’t sense any motion it turns itself off, further saving energy.

Page 202: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

202

IEQ Credit 8 | Quality Views

This credit can earn one point. The intent is to give building occupants a connection to the natural outdoor environment by providing quality views. Where daylighting is getting light in, you get views looking out.

75% Direct Line of Sight

The requirement is to achieve a direct line of sight to the outdoors via vision glazing for 75% of all regularly occupied floor area. Your view glazing in the contributing area must provide a clear image of the exterior, not obstructed by frits, fibers, patterned glazing, or added tints that distort color balance. In addition, direct line of sight also means not obstructed by furniture, doors, or partitions. Site lines can be drawn through interior glazing, such as glass partitions.

Quality of Views

On top of that quantity requirement, 75% of views must meet at least 2 of the following quality requirement: Multiple lines of sight to vision glazing in different directions at least 90 degrees

apart Views that include at least two of the following: (1) flora, fauna, or sky; (2)

movement; and (3) objects at least 25 feet from the exterior of the glazing Unobstructed views located within the distance of three times the head height of

the vision glazing. What that means is if you have a window that is seven feet tall, you have to have views from at least 21 feet inside the building to the outdoors. Unobstructed horizontal distances equal to three times the head height of windows.

Views with a view factor of 3 or greater, as defined in the standard “Windows and Offices; A Study of Office Worker Performance and the Indoor Environment.”

Interior Design

Identify sight lines from regularly occupied space to exterior views. As we’ve seen in the definitions, this means areas with direct line of site to the perimeter of the building’s glazing - basically windows or transparent parts of the building walls. Teams must include full height partitions and other fixed construction items in their drawings, and any items that are in the building before it is furnished. Teams must identify all regularly occupied rooms or areas and determine the total floor area in square feet or square meters.

Page 203: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

203

Then teams should use a floor plan and construct sight lines for each window or glazing and determine what areas have direct lines-of-sight to the outdoors. Remember that movable furniture and partitions may be included in this credit, but are not required.

Healthcare

For healthcare projects inpatient units must meet the view requirements. And the building floor plates need to be arranged in a particular way to support views to both staff and patients. For warehouses the requirements need only be met by the office portion of the building.

IEQ Prerequisite Schools | Minimum Acoustic Performance

Schools is the only rating system that requires acoustical performance as a prerequisite. In k-12 schools, there is a direct correlation between how quiet a room is, and how good test scores are. It’s that simple. The prerequisites and credits in LEED are considered minimum good practice for acoustics, according to acoustical consultants and experts in learning environments. Green building teams and occupant groups may choose to go beyond these credits to create better sound quality and noise control based on the use of spaces and functional goals. The prerequisite is based on three parameters: HVAC background noise, exterior noise, and reverberation time. For the scope of this prerequisite, only look at typical classroom spaces. Natatoriums, auditoriums, performance spaces, and special education classrooms are exempt because they all have unique acoustic requirements.

Referenced Standards

Among the reference documents most valuable for design is the 2011 ASHRAE Handbook – HVAC Application, which covers sound and vibration control precepts as well as reference noise criteria (NC) and room criteria (RC) in various types of interior spaces. Best practices can also be found in ANSI Standard S12.60–2010 and AHRI Standard 885–2008; or a local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.

Background Noise

HVAC systems may only have a maximum of 40 decibels in classrooms and learning areas. Designers can analyze sound pressure levels from HVAC equipment. Other

Page 204: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

204

equipment, like plumbing, electrical, and lighting systems are exempt. Field testing must be done after construction and before occupancy.

Exterior Noise

High-noise sites are defined as having a peak-hour noise level of 60 dB. Projects at least one-half mile (800 meters) from any significant noise source (e.g., aircraft overflights, highways, trains, industry) are exempt. Otherwise, project teams should design acoustic treatments and other measures to minimize noise intrusion from exterior sources. In addition, design classrooms and other core learning spaces to control sound transmission between spaces.

Reverberation Time

Reverberation time is a measure of how long a sound continues to reflect off surfaces after the source has stopped emitting the sound. In a school environment, a short reverberation time improves understanding of speech and removes unnecessary barriers to learning. The design strategy to reduce reverberation time is to install sound absorptive finishes on the walls, ceilings, and floors. Reverberation time is basically a function of room volume or size divided by the absorption of the surfaces and construction assemblies. The bigger the volume, the longer the reverberation time; the better the absorption of surfaces, the shorter the reverberation time. A large concert hall with wood wall panels and a concrete floor will have long reverberation time results, while a small office with carpet and a suspended acoustical ceiling will have reverberation times on the shorter end of the range. Short reverberation times (RT) of 1 second or less are better for spaces requiring high levels of speech intelligibility, such as classrooms. In concert halls and theaters, it is the opposite: Long RT times add resonance and increase perceived loudness in the spaces. RTs of 1.5 seconds or greater are typical in these performance spaces. There are two different sets of referenced standards and requirements for reverberation time based on the size of the room. Path 1 is for small rooms less than 20,000 cubic feet (566 cubic meters). Path 2 is for large rooms over or equal to 20,000 cubic feet (566 cubic meter).

Path 1 contains two options. Option 1 is a prescriptive path. Project teams design the total surface area of acoustic wall panels, ceiling finishes, and other sound-absorbent finishes to meet or exceeds the total ceiling area of the room. The goal is to specify materials with a Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) of 0.70 or higher. Compliance can be met by providing 100% acoustical ceiling tiles, exempting the surface area of diffusers and lights.

Page 205: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

205

Path 1: option 2 is to confirm through calculations that rooms are designed to achieve reverberation time guidelines stated ANSI Standard S12.60-2010. Path 2 requires calculations demonstrating achievement of recommended reverberation times for classrooms and core learning spaces described in the NRC-CNRC Construction Technology Update No. 51, Acoustical Design of Rooms for Speech.

Program Design Strategies

The school concept and classroom layout also impact acoustics, and while there are many novel teaching approaches, not all are good for speech intelligibility. Open-plan classrooms can improve student-teacher interaction but they also impede proper acoustical design. Some open classrooms use space dividers, which can improve visual privacy and concentration but are poor acoustical isolators. Schools with hard-surface walls and resilient floors cause echoes and reverberation, which limit speech understanding and only get worse when the teacher raises his or her voice. Consult with an expert or the ANSI standard. The key is to specify products that reduce sound transmission. Architects are quite good at this. Be able to identify the materials that will help you qualify for these reverberation times and acoustical performance requirements. These decisions could reach to the building envelop to improve the thermal insulation. One of the least costly and fastest ways to achieve proper classroom acoustics is by using sound-absorbing lay-in ceiling tiles (NRC of 0.70 or better) and a low-pile carpet, which limits noise created by students. Furniture and bookcases can cut back wall echoes. Larger lecture halls with theater-style seating benefit from absorptive fabric panels, acoustical tiles and plasters on the walls; the ceiling can be used as a hard, reflective surface to project the teacher’s voice to the back of the hall.

IEQ Credit 9 | Acoustic Performance

For too long, green buildings sacrificed acoustic quality for other benefits like open space planning, daylight, and efficient HVAC design. The intent of this credit is to provide guidelines for all building types to enhance occupants’ comfort, productivity, and communications through acoustic design. Building upon the School prerequisite, the principles of good classroom acoustics are also relevant to meeting rooms, conference rooms, and auditoriums for business and especially healthcare facilities.

Page 206: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

206

Project teams will look at each occupant space to address the needs of the users, and what privacy or sound requirements are needed. There are four performance areas which must be evaluated for this credit: HVAC background noise Sound isolation Reverberation time Sound reinforcement and masking

Background Noise

Permissible HVAC background noise is defined in the 2011 HVAC Application ASHRAE Handbook, chapter 48, Noise and Vibration Control. Consider strategies like locating noise generating equipment over corridors rather than conference rooms. In addition, calculate and measure sound pressure levels per AHRI Standard 885-2008, or a local equivalent. In drawings, highlight sound transmission paths and identify adjacencies for sound isolation.

Sound Isolation

For sound isolation, meet the composite sound transmission class (STC) ratings listed. Sound isolation can be achieved through published manufacturer’s data, calculating the values for the assemblies, or measuring the STC rating for all assemblies. When using published data select wall and door assemblies that meet the requirements. For the calculations, identify the STC ratings for all the assemblies during the design phase to make sure the averages comply with the requirements. Calculations allow choosing materials where some may have higher or lower STC ratings, as long as they average out. If measurements are done, they must occur after substantial completion. Measure the noise isolation class for all assemblies.

Sound Reinforcement and Masking

For all large conference rooms and auditoriums seating more than 50 persons, evaluate whether sound reinforcement and AV playback capabilities are needed. Exterior windows must have an STC rating of at least 35, unless outdoor and indoor noise levels can be verified to justify a lower rating. For projects that use masking systems, the design levels must not exceed 48 dBA. Ensure that loudspeaker coverage provides uniformity of plus or minus 2dBA and that speech spectra are effectively masked. For school projects, HVAC background noise must be reduced to 35 decibels. Design classrooms and other core learning spaces to meet the sound transmission class (STC) requirements of ANSI S12.60–2010 Part 1, or a local equivalent.

Page 207: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

207

Reverberation Time

Projects must meet the time requirement table in the reference guide. Room type and application organize spaces such as office teleconference versus laboratory testing.

Rating System Adaptation

There is an adaptation for healthcare projects, where acoustics play an important role. There are two options for the goal of either speech privacy or material selection. The LEED requirements are adapted from the 2010 FGI Guidelines for Design and Construction of Health Care Facilities.

Key Terms

Ashrae 62.1 Chartered Institution Of Building Services Engineers (Cibse) Active Ventilation

Passive Ventilation

Mixed-Mode Natural Ventilation

Entryway Systems Cross Contamination Exfiltration Merv 13 Densely Occupied Tvocfloorscore Greenguard Certified Scs Indoor Advantage Collaborative For High Performance Schools (Chps) Bifma Level (If 7.6.1 And/Or 7.6.2 Were Achieved) Tpc List Carb Ulef Label Or Carb Exempt Nsf-332 Greenguard Gold Scs Indoor Advantage Ashrae 52.2 Flush Out Ashrae 55 Lamp Life Color Rendering Index (Cri) Luminance Spatial Daylight Autonomy (Sda)

Page 208: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

208

Work Plane Daylight Autonomy Annual Sunlight Exposure (Ase) Reflectance Background Noise Reverberation Time Sound Transmission Class (Stc)

Page 209: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

209

Chapter 9 - Innovation

Overview

Innovation is a flexible category used to award points for performance and creativity. The category is flexible because the points in this section are not necessarily earmarked for specific items completed or designed, there is total user control. The Innovation credit category has 2 credits: Innovation LEED Accredited Professional

Three Approaches

Option 1 is called Innovation, and can earn 1 point. This option rewards projects for achieving significant, measurable environmental performance using a strategy not addressed in the LEED green building rating system. You can think of this as outside-the-box thinking. The goal is to invent an idea that isn’t part of LEED, but has a measurable environmental impact. Option 2 is to achieve one of the pilot credits from USGBC’s pilot credit library. This option can earn one point. Look at usgbc.org for current pilot credits, as they change regularly. Option 3 is Additional Strategies. Additional strategies allow project teams to earn 1 to 3 points for Innovation, defined in Option 1, 1 to 3 points for Pilot credits, and 1 to 2 points for Exemplary performance. Project teams can use any combination of innovation, pilot, and exemplary performance strategies. Exemplary performance is when a project meets the exemplary performance threshold in a credit. The exemplary performance point is typically earned for achieving double the credit requirements or the next incremental percentage threshold.

Innovation

The first option – innovation – is where you can use your creativity. Think about your project, your project situation, where it’s situated, your project team, the project owner, and what the unique conditions are. What are the environmental issues that exist outside of the LEED rating system? The LEED rating system cannot cover every green building idea or be revised to cover every new technology – so the system allows for innovative performance. Innovation is used to describe new and unique ways of exceeding green building or operating goals in a significant and, most importantly, measurable way that is not covered in the LEED system.

Page 210: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

210

Innovative strategies must meet three criteria: The strategy must demonstrate a quantifiable environmental performance benefit

The strategy must be applied comprehensively (i.e. wherever possible on the project). For example, one project used a snow melting system to eliminate the use of chemicals to melt snow. Using the snow melting system on 10% of the walkways and chemicals on the remaining 90% would not be considered comprehensive. The snow melting system would need to be used for 100% of the walkways.

The strategy must be a superior design choice compared to standard building design.

The requirements for compliance include defining what the threshold of achievement is and proposing submittals to demonstrate how those requirements are met. When proposing how an Innovation credit is going to be achieved, project teams must describe the design strategy and approaches for implementing those strategies. Look at the structure of an existing LEED credit to design your own.

Borrowing Credits

Innovation points can also be earned by achieving selected credits from other LEED rating systems, as long as the credit isn’t already part of the project’s rating system. For example implementing Indoor Water Efficiency credit from one of the ID+C rating systems isn’t innovative, since the BD+C rating systems already have that credit. Implementing the Design for Flexibility option from the Interiors Life-Cycle Impact Reduction credit of the ID+C rating system might be an option.

Pilot Credits

The Pilot Credit Library facilitates the introduction of new credits to the LEED rating systems. The process allows projects to test more innovative credits that haven't been through the complete drafting and balloting process. It is developed as a component of USGBC's existing process of ongoing credit research and evaluations. Pilot credits are great for learning opportunities. Pilot credits provide focused, real-world credits which create a professional and experiential feedback opportunity for the volunteers who serve as LEED credit authors. Pilot testing allows one to make informed decisions about the technical merit and feasibility of LEED ideas and helps promote the development of smarter and more effective LEED strategies. It is a crucial step in recognizing whether the ideas are appropriate to be integrated into LEED in the future or not. If, after certain evaluations, the LEED pilot credit is deemed ineffective, it can either be modified or completely removed.

Page 211: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

211

All registered projects may apply for a pilot credit. There are individual credit documents which will determine if the credit is available for the project types. To apply for a LEED pilot credit, project teams can register at the USGBC website. Project teams can register for multiple pilot credits. For an effective registration, be sure to have your project ID, project name, rating system, project type, and project administrator's information. Pilot credits are part of the Innovation credit we’re talking about here. The pilot credit uses the IN credit template when applying for the credit in LEED-Online. This template and the documentation must be uploaded to LEED Online for review. Pilot credits in the Innovation section are worth one point each. Project teams can earn up to the maximum allowable number of points available in the Innovation credit. If the project points are already used for other innovation strategies, only the remaining IN credits will be available for pilot credit use.

Case Study

Before we leave the topic of Pilot Credits, let’s look at and example - the Ergonomics Strategy pilot credit. Ergonomics is something most people have heard about. The requirements of this pilot credit are to identify the activities and building functions which can benefit from its application in ergonomics by selecting proper ergonomic furnishings and equipment, and providing ergonomics education. Consult current ergonomics standards and guidelines that are relevant to the tasks that will be performed in the building. The requirements list several referenced standards. Before designing the interior such as the lighting, thermal environment, office layout, individual workstation and design, workstation and equipment, consult and analyze occupant needs first. Review potential design options with occupants. Analyze occupant needs through the following criteria: User characteristics such as age, size, weight, shape, gender, and

ability/disability.

Tasks performed in terms of its importance and priority of tasks, and the frequency of the duration.

Equipment materials used along with the storage requirements.

Demonstrate that the key principles were incorporated in the interior design which promotes occupant well-being in terms of health, performance, and satisfaction.

Page 212: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

212

Provide ergonomics education and training to all users when installing furniture and equipment.

Exemplary Performance

Performance above and beyond the LEED requirements is rated “exemplary.” An example of exemplary performance is to meet the next incremental step of the requirements. The exemplary performance point is typically earned for achieving double the credit requirements or the next incremental percentage threshold. If a credit requires 20% or 30% for points, achieve 40% for exemplary. If a credit requires 50%, the next threshold is likely 95%, or 100%.

Timeline

The most important part of successfully achieving the Innovation credit is planning early. As early as the pre-design phase any team member can start thinking about how exemplary performance can be achieved, or what new technologies are available that might be beneficial for an innovation or pilot credit strategy. Project teams should confirm early on the eligibility for an Innovation credit. A note on the basic criteria - projects must exude a significantly better standard than the standard sustainable design practices. This is “outside but inside the box” in regards to designer creativity. Ask yourself - what can we implement and execute to have building performance benefit the occupants and the environment?

LEED Accredited Professional

This credit encourages the team integration required by a LEED project and to streamline the application and certification process At least one principal participant of the project team must be a LEED Accredited Professional (AP) with a specialty appropriate for the project. A LEED Green Associate does NOT count for this credit.

A LEED AP without specialty – legacy LEED APs – do not qualify for this credit.

The LEED AP submitted for the credit must have an active credential at the time of the certification review.

‘Principal participant’ is defined as a person who is working on all aspects and contributing to the total project.

Page 213: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

213

A landscaper who is a LEED AP and shows up at the very end of construction to plant a few trees is NOT the spirit of this credit though some projects in the past get away with this approach just to earn this point. This has to be one of the easiest points to earn on a project. On a LEED v4 project you can almost guarantee there is a team member that has the appropriate LEED AP with specialty on the project.

Specialty Designation

With LEED v4 the LEED AP credit requirements changed to require the LEED AP have the specialty be appropriate for the LEED rating system being used for the project. A New Construction project requires a LEED AP with a BD+C specialty to earn the LEED AP credit.

Benefits

The LEED AP will help streamline the process, so it’s a good idea to have them on the project anyway. Engage the LEED AP to participate during the certification application process, and/or hire a LEED AP consultant for project support. The LEED AP should: Participate in the LEED application and certification process

Be knowledgeable about green building principles and practices

Be familiar with LEED requirements, resources, and processes

Assist with the design and construction process

A LEED AP is not required for projects but the presence of a LEED AP will significantly aid in any LEED project. People new to LEED and the LEED rating system will often ask if having more LEED APs will earn a project more points. This is not true. One – and only one - point is awarded for having a LEED AP on a project who is acting in the role of a principal participant.

Page 214: Studio4 LEED v4 Green Associate 101 Questions & 101 Answers First Edition.pdf

214

Chapter 10 – Regional Priority

Overview

Because some environmental issues are unique to a locale, USGBC regional councils have identified distinct environmental zones within their areas and allocated six credits to encourage design teams to focus on regional priorities. A project that earns a Regional Priority credit automatically earns one point in addition to any points awarded for that credit. Up to four extra points can be earned in this way. For the area that your project is located, 6 credits have been identified as regional priorities, but only 4 of those points can be achieved. So while you have 6 to choose from, a project can earn a maximum of 4 bonus points. Regional priority credits and points are for normal LEED credits. They are not new credits written for each region. Project teams don’t have to do anything special to attempt and earn them, such as getting exemplary performance. When a project is registered with LEED online the project’s location is used to automatically credit the project with any regional priority credits that are earned, up to 4 points.

Timeline

When a project is in the pre-design stage, identify what regional priority credits are available for the project. By determining the regional priority credits early on it may help guide the project team on what credits the project should pursue. This will help the project team estimate how many points the team is targeting, and learn which credits USGBC deems particularly important in your project’s location.

Research

What LEED credits are priorities in your area? Visit usgbc.org/rpc and try out the search tool. Early on in your project design, review the credits that can earn your project extra points and discuss if achieving these credits should be a project goal. Wherever your project is located, check the website and find out which Regional Priority Credits have been identified by the Regional Chapter as important credits. Note that each rating system may have different RP credits associated with it.